HOYA CORPORATIONPENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX Europe Imaging 112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
Systems S.A.S.
FRANCE(European Headquarters) (HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)(France - http://www.pentax.fr)

SLR Digital Camera

PENTAX Imaging Systems Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,GmbH
GERMANY(http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX Imaging Systems PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks
LimitedSL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)

Operating Manual

PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401,
U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
250 North 54th Street Chandler, Arizona 85226, U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA(http://www.pentax.ca)

PENTAX Trading(SHANGHAI) Limited

23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA(http://www.pentax.com.cn)

http://www.pentax.jp/english

Operating Manual

PENTAX Canada Inc.

• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
58187

Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2010
H01-201008 Printed in Philippines

For optimum camera performance, please read the Operating
Manual before using the camera.

Thank you for purchasing this PENTAX W Digital Camera. Please read this manual
before using the camera in order to get the most out of all the features and functions.
Keep this manual safe, as it can be a valuable tool in helping you to understand all thecamera’s capabilities.
Lenses you can use
In general, lenses that can be used with this camera are DA, DA L, D FA and FA J
lenses and lenses that have an s (Auto) position on the aperture ring. To use any otherlens or accessory, see p.56 and p.312.
Regarding copyrights
Images taken with the W that are for anything other than personal enjoyment
cannot be used without permission according to the rights as specified in the CopyrightAct. Please take care, as there are cases where limitations are placed on taking
pictures even for personal enjoyment during demonstrations, performances or of items
on display. Images taken with the purpose of obtaining copyrights also cannot be usedoutside the scope of use of the copyright as laid out in the Copyright Act, and careshould be taken here also.
Regarding trademarks
PENTAX, W and smc PENTAX are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
PENTAX Digital Camera Utility and SDM are trademarks of HOYA CORPORATION.
Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and other countries. Windows Vista is either a registered trademark or
trademark of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc., registered in the U.S. and othercountries.
SDHC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
This product includes DNG technology under license by Adobe Systems Incorporated.
The DNG logo is either registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems
Incorporated in the United States and/or other countries.
IrSimple™ and IrSST™ Trademarks are owned by the Infrared Data Association®.
All other brands or product names are trademarks or registered trademarks of theirrespective companies. However, the TM or ® marks are not used in all cases in thismanual.
This product supports PRINT Image Matching III. PRINT Image Matching enabled
digital still cameras, printers and software help photographers to produce images morefaithful to their intentions. Some functions are not available on printers that are not
PRINT Image Matching III compliant.
Copyright 2001 Seiko Epson Corporation. All Rights Reserved.
PRINT Image Matching is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.
The PRINT Image Matching logo is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

To users of this camera• Do not use or store this device in the vicinity of equipment that generates strong
electromagnetic radiation or magnetic fields. Strong static charges or the magnetic
fields produced by equipment such as radio transmitters could interfere with themonitor, damage the stored data, or affect the product’s internal circuitry and cause
camera misoperation.
• The liquid crystal panel used in the monitor is manufactured using extremely highprecision technology. Although the level of functioning pixels is 99.99% or better, you
should be aware that 0.01% or fewer of the pixels may not illuminate or may illuminate
when they should not. However, this has no effect on the recorded image.
• There is a possibility that the illustrations and the display screen of the monitor in thismanual are different from the actual ones.
• In this manual, the generic term “computer(s)” refers to either a Windows PC or a
Macintosh hereafter.
• The camera can use either D-LI109 battery or the optional AA battery holder D-BH109
with four AA batteries. In this manual, both the D-LI109 and D-BH109 are referred toas the battery hereafter.
Except stated above, the generic term “battery(ies)” refers to any type of batteries
used for this camera and its accessories.

For Using Your Camera Safely
We have paid close attention to the safety of this product. When using thisproduct, we request your special attention regarding items marked with thefollowing symbols.
Warning
CautionThis symbol indicates that violating this item could cause
serious personal injuries.
This symbol indicates that violating this item could cause minor
or medium personal injuries, or loss of property.

About the Camera
Warning• Do not disassemble or modify the camera. High voltage areas are present inside thecamera, with the risk of electric shock.
• If the camera interior is exposed due to dropping or otherwise damaging the camera,
never touch the exposed portion. There is a risk of electric shock.
• Do not look directly at the sun through the camera with a telephoto lens attached, asviewing the sun may damage your eyes. Viewing the sun directly with a telephoto lens
may lead to a loss of eyesight.
• If any irregularities occur during use, such as smoke or a strange odor, stop use
immediately, remove the battery or the AC adapter, and contact your nearest
PENTAX Service Center. Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electric
shock.

1

2• Do not place your finger over the flash when discharging the flash. You may burnyourself.
• Do not cover the flash with clothing when discharging the flash. Discoloration may
occur.
• Do not send data via infrared transmission with the infrared port of the camera pointed
at a person’s eyes. Doing so may cause impaired eyesight and other injury.
• Some portions of the camera heat up during use. There is a risk of low temperatureburns when holding such portions for long periods.
• Should the monitor be damaged, be careful of glass fragments. Also, be careful not
to allow the liquid crystal to get on your skin or in your eyes or mouth.
• Depending on your individual factors or physical condition, the use of the camera may
cause itching, rashes or blisters. In case of any abnormality, stop using the camera
and get medical attention immediately.

About the Battery Charger and AC Adapter
Warning• Always use the battery charger and AC adapter exclusively developed for thisproduct, with the specified power and voltage. Using a battery charger or AC adapter
not exclusive to this product, or using the exclusive battery charger or AC adapter withan unspecified power or voltage can cause a fire, electric shock, or camera
breakdown. The specified voltage is 100 - 240V AC.
• Do not disassemble or modify the product. This can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If the generation of smoke or strange odor from the product or other abnormality
occurs, immediately discontinue using and consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If water should happen to get inside the product, consult a PENTAX Service Center.
Continuing to use the product can cause a fire or electrical shock.
• If thunderstorm should be present during use of the battery charger and AC plug cord,
unplug the power plug and discontinue use. Continuing to use the product can cause
damage to the equipment, fire or electrical shock.
• Wipe off the power plug if it should become covered with dust. Accumulated dust may
cause a fire.
• To reduce the risk of hazards, use only CSA/UL certified power supply cord set, cord
is Type SPT-2 or heavier, minimum NO.18 AWG copper, one end with a molded-on
male attachment plug cap (with a specified NEMA configuration), and the other isprovided with a molded-on female connector body (with a specified IEC nonindustrial
type configuration) or the equivalent.

Caution• Do not place or drop heavy objects on or forcefully bend the AC plug cord. Doing so
may damage the cord. Should the AC plug cord be damaged, consult a PENTAX
Service Center.
• Do not touch or short-circuit the terminal area of the AC plug cord while the cord isplugged in.
• Do not handle the power plug with wet hands. This can cause an electric shock.
• Do not drop the product, or subject it to violent impact. This can cause equipment
breakdown.
• Do not use the battery charger to charge batteries other than the rechargeable
lithium-ion battery D-LI109. Attempting to charge other types of batteries may cause
an explosion or heating, or may damage the battery charger.

3
About the Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery
Warning• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.

Caution• Only use the specified battery with this camera. Use of other batteries may cause an
explosion or fire.
• Do not disassemble the battery. Disassembling the battery may cause an explosion
or leakage.
• Remove the battery from the camera immediately if it becomes hot or begins tosmoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.
• Keep wires, hairpins, and other metal objects away from the + and - contacts of thebattery.
• Do not short the battery or dispose of the battery in fire. This can cause an explosion
or fire.
• If any leakage from the battery should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Precautions for D-LI109 Battery Usage:
USE SPECIFIED CHARGER ONLY.
- DO NOT INCINERATE.
- DO NOT DISASSEMBLE.
- DO NOT SHORT CIRCUIT.
- DO NOT EXPOSE TO HIGH TEMP. (140°F / 60°C)

About the Usage of AA Batteries
Warning• If any leakage from the batteries should come in contact with your eyes, do not rub
them. Flush your eyes with clean water and get medical attention immediately.

Caution• When using the optional AA battery holder D-BH109, four AA alkaline, AA lithium or
AA Ni-MH batteries can be used. Do not use batteries other than those specified here.
Using other types of batteries may cause the camera to function poorly, or thebatteries may explode or cause a fire.
• AA alkaline and AA lithium batteries cannot be recharged. Do not disassemble thebatteries. Attempting to charge non-rechargeable batteries or disassembling thebatteries could result in explosion or leakage.
• The batteries should be inserted correctly, observing (+) and (-) marks on thebatteries. Inserting the batteries incorrectly may cause an explosion or fire.
• When replacing the batteries, do not combine different brands, types or capacities.
Also, do not combine old batteries with new ones. Doing so may cause the batteries
to explode or cause a fire.
• Do not short the batteries or dispose of the batteries in fire. Do not disassemble thebatteries. The batteries could explode or catch fire.

4• Do not charge any batteries other than rechargeable Ni-MH batteries. The batteries
could explode or catch fire. AA batteries for use with this camera other than Ni-MH
batteries cannot be charged.
• If any leakage from the batteries should come in contact with skin or clothes, it may
cause irritation to the skin. Wash the affected areas thoroughly with water.
• Remove the batteries from the camera immediately if they become hot or begin tosmoke. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal.

Keep the Camera and its Accessories out of
the Reach of Small Children
Warning• Do not place the camera and its accessories within the reach of small children.
1. If the product falls or is operated accidentally it may cause serious personal injuries.
2. Wrapping the strap around a neck may cause suffocation.
3. To avoid the risk of a small accessory such as the battery or SD Memory Cards
from being swallowed by mistake, keep them out of the reach of small children.
Seek medical attention immediately if an accessory is accidentally swallowed.

Care to be Taken During Handling
Before Using Your Camera• When traveling, take the Worldwide Service Network listing that is included in the
package. This will be useful if you experience problems abroad.
• When the camera has not been used for a long time, confirm that it is still working
properly, particularly prior to taking important pictures (such as at a wedding or whentraveling). Contents of the recording cannot be guaranteed if recording, playback ortransferring your data to a computer, etc. is not possible due to a malfunction of yourcamera or recording media (SD Memory Card), etc.

About the Battery and Charger• Storing the battery fully charged may decrease the battery performance. Avoid storingin high temperatures.
• If the battery is left inserted and the camera is not used for a long time, the battery will
over-discharge and shorten the battery’s life.
• Charging the battery a day before use or on the day of use is recommended.
• The AC plug cord provided with this camera is developed exclusively for the battery
charger D-BC109. Do not use it with other devices.

Precautions on Carrying and Using Your Camera• Do not subject the camera to high temperatures or high humidity. Do not leave thecamera in a vehicle, as the temperature can get very high.

• Do not subject the camera to strong vibrations, shocks, or pressure. Use a cushion toprotect the camera from vibrations of motorcycles, automobiles, or ships.
• The temperature range for camera use is 0°C to 40°C (32°F to 104°F).
• The monitor may appear black at high temperatures, but will return to normal atnormal temperatures.
• The monitor may respond more slowly at low temperatures. This is due to liquid
crystal properties, and is not a malfunction.
• Sudden temperature changes will cause condensation on the inside and outside of
the camera. Place the camera in your bag or a plastic bag, and remove the camera
after temperature of the camera and surroundings are equalized.
• Avoid contact with garbage, mud, sand, dust, water, toxic gases, or salts. These could
cause the camera to breakdown. Wipe the camera to dry off any rain or water drops.
• Please do not press forcefully on the monitor. This could cause it to break or
malfunction.
• Be careful not to overtighten the screw in the tripod socket when using a tripod.

Cleaning Your Camera• Do not clean the product with organic solvents such as thinner, alcohol, or benzine.
• Use a lens brush to remove dust accumulated on the lens or viewfinder. Never use aspray blower for cleaning as it may damage the lens.
• Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning of the CMOS
sensor. (This will involve a fee.)

Storing Your Camera• Do not store the camera with preservatives or chemicals. Storage in hightemperatures and high humidity can cause mold to grow on the camera. Remove thecamera from its case and store it in a dry and well-ventilated place.

Other Precautions• Periodic inspections are recommended every one to two years to maintain highperformance.
• Refer to “Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card” (p.53) regarding the SD
Memory Card.
• Please note that deleting data stored on an SD Memory Card, or formatting an SD
Memory Card does not completely erase the original data. Deleted files cansometimes be recovered using commercially available software. It is the user’s
responsibility to ensure the privacy of such data.

Regarding Product Registration
In order to better serve you, we request that you complete the product registration,
which can be found on the CD-ROM supplied with the camera or on the PENTAX
website. Refer to p.301 for details. Thank you for your cooperation.

5

6Contents
For Using Your Camera Safely ............................................................ 1
Care to be Taken During Handling ...................................................... 4Contents............................................................................................... 6
Composition of the Operating Manual ............................................... 13

Before Using Your Camera

15

W Camera Characteristics.....................................................16
Checking the Contents of the Package ......................................18
Names and Functions of Working Parts ....................................19
Capture Mode .................................................................................... 20
Playback Mode .................................................................................. 22

Display Indicators.........................................................................24
Monitor ............................................................................................... 24
Viewfinder .......................................................................................... 32

How to Change Function Settings ..............................................34
Using the Direct Keys ........................................................................ 34
Using the Control Panel ..................................................................... 35
Using the Menus ................................................................................ 37

Getting Started

41

Attaching the Strap ......................................................................42
Inserting the Battery.....................................................................43
Using the Lithium-ion Battery ............................................................. 43
Using the AA Batteries....................................................................... 46
Battery Level Indicator ....................................................................... 49
Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback Time (Fully
Charged Battery/New AA Batteries) .................................................. 49
Using the AC Adapter (Optional) ....................................................... 50

Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card...................................52
Recorded Pixels and Quality Level .................................................... 54

Attaching a Lens...........................................................................56
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter................................................58
Turning the Camera On and Off ..................................................59
Initial Settings ...............................................................................60
Setting the Display Language ............................................................ 60
Setting the Date and Time ................................................................. 64

Basic Operations

67

Basic Shooting Operation ...........................................................68
Holding the Camera ........................................................................... 68
Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings.............................. 69

Using a Zoom Lens ......................................................................74
Using the Built-in Flash ...............................................................75
Setting the Flash Mode ...................................................................... 75
Compensating Flash Output .............................................................. 81

Playing Back Pictures ..................................................................82
Playing Back Images ......................................................................... 82
Deleting a Single Image..................................................................... 84

Shooting Functions

85

How to Operate the Shooting Functions....................................86
Direct Keys Setting Items................................................................... 86
Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items.......................................................... 87
Custom Setting Menu Setting Items .................................................. 89

Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode...................................91
Picture Modes .................................................................................... 92
H Modes......................................................................................... 93
Exposure Modes ................................................................................ 95

Setting the Exposure....................................................................96
Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed ................................................ 96
Setting the Sensitivity......................................................................... 98
Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)................................. 100
Changing the Exposure Mode ......................................................... 103
Selecting the Metering Method ........................................................ 114
Adjusting the Exposure .................................................................... 117
Locking the Exposure Before Shooting(AE Lock) ......................................................................................... 120

Focusing......................................................................................122
Using the Autofocus......................................................................... 122
Setting the AF Mode ........................................................................ 125
AF Fine Adjustment ......................................................................... 128
Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)........................................... 129
Locking the Focus (Focus Lock) ...................................................... 132
Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus) ................................ 134

78Checking the Composition, Exposure and Focus Before
Shooting (Preview) .....................................................................137
Assigning the Preview Function to the Green Button ...................... 137
Displaying the Optical Preview ........................................................ 139
Displaying the Digital Preview.......................................................... 140

Using the Shake Reduction Function to Prevent Camera
Shake ...........................................................................................141
Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function ..................... 141
Shooting with Self-timer ................................................................... 145
Shooting with Remote Control (Optional) ........................................ 147

Taking Pictures Continuously...................................................149
Continuous Shooting........................................................................ 149
Interval Shooting .............................................................................. 151
Multi-exposure ................................................................................. 153

Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters ........................................155
Shooting with Live View ............................................................159
Setting Live View ............................................................................. 160
Taking Still Pictures ......................................................................... 162

Recording Movies.......................................................................165
Changing the Movie Settings ........................................................... 165
Recording Movies ............................................................................ 167
Playing Back Movies ........................................................................ 169
Editing Movies.................................................................................. 171

Using the Flash173

Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode........................174
Using the Slow-speed Sync ............................................................. 174
Using the Trailing Curtain Sync ....................................................... 176

Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in Flash............178
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash ...............................179
Using an External Flash (Optional)...........................................180
Using P-TTL Auto Mode .................................................................. 181
Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode ............................................... 182
Using Flash in Wireless Mode ......................................................... 183
Connecting an External Flash with an Extension Cord.................... 187
Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension Cords .............................. 188
Contrast-Control-Sync Flash............................................................ 189

Shooting Settings

191

Setting a File Format ..................................................................192
Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels .................................................. 192
Setting the JPEG Quality Level........................................................ 193
Setting the File Format..................................................................... 195

Setting the Green Button Function...........................................197
Setting the White Balance .........................................................200
Adjusting the White Balance Manually............................................. 202
Fine-Tuning the White Balance........................................................ 204
Setting the Color Space ................................................................... 205

Correcting Images ......................................................................207
Adjusting Brightness ........................................................................ 207
Lens Correction................................................................................ 211

Setting the Image Finishing Tone .............................................213
Setting Custom Image ..................................................................... 213
Setting Cross Processing................................................................. 216

Playback Functions

219

Playback Functions Operation..................................................220
Playback Mode Palette Setting Items .............................................. 220
Playback Menu Setting Items .......................................................... 221

Setting the Playback Display Method.......................................222
Enlarging Images........................................................................223
Displaying Multiple Images .......................................................224
Multi-image Display Screen ............................................................. 224
Displaying Images by Folder............................................................ 225
Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar Display) ................ 226
Comparing Images........................................................................... 228
Joining Multiple Images (Index) ....................................................... 229

Playing Back Images Continuously..........................................232
Setting the Slideshow Display.......................................................... 232
Starting the Slideshow ..................................................................... 233

Rotating Images..........................................................................235
Deleting Multiple Images ...........................................................236
Deleting Selected Images ................................................................ 236
Deleting a Folder.............................................................................. 238
Deleting All Images .......................................................................... 239

910

Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ..............................240
Protecting a Single Image................................................................ 240
Protecting All Images ....................................................................... 241

Connecting the Camera to an AV Device .................................242
Exchanging Image Data with Other Devices............................244
Sending and Receiving Image Data via Infrared Transmission ....... 244
Playing a Dueling Game using Your Images (Dueling Images)....... 246

Processing Images

249

Changing the Image Size ...........................................................250
Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels and Quality Level(Resize)............................................................................................ 250
Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping) ........................................ 251

Processing Images with Digital Filters.....................................253
Applying the Digital Filter ................................................................. 255
Recreating Filter Effects................................................................... 256
Searching for the Original Image ..................................................... 258

Developing RAW Images ...........................................................259
Developing One RAW Image........................................................... 259
Developing Multiple RAW Images ................................................... 260
Specifying the Parameters............................................................... 262

Changing Additional Settings

265

How to Operate the Set-up Menu ..............................................266
Set-up Menu Setting Items .............................................................. 266

Formatting an SD Memory Card................................................268
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display Language ......269
Setting the Beep .............................................................................. 269
Changing the Date and Time Display .............................................. 270
Setting the World Time .................................................................... 270
Setting the Display Language .......................................................... 273

Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display ..........................274
Setting the Text Size........................................................................ 274
Setting the Guide Display Time ....................................................... 274
Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed ............................................ 275
Setting the Status Screen Display ................................................... 276
Setting the Display for Instant Review ............................................. 276
Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor ........................................... 277
Adjusting the Color of the Monitor.................................................... 278

Setting the Folder/File Number .................................................279
Changing the Naming System of the Folder .................................... 279
Creating New Folders ...................................................................... 279
Selecting the File Number Setting ................................................... 280

Selecting the Power Settings ....................................................281
Setting the Auto Power Off Function................................................ 281
Setting the Battery Type .................................................................. 282

Setting the Photographer Information......................................283
Setting the DPOF Settings.........................................................285
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS Sensor(Pixel Mapping) ...........................................................................287
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera (Memory)...............288

Connecting to a Computer

291

Manipulating Captured Images on a Computer.......................292
Saving Images on Your Computer............................................293
Setting the USB Connection Mode .................................................. 293
Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera and Your Computer .. 294

Using the Provided Software.....................................................296
Installing the Software...................................................................... 296
Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 ............................. 298

Appendix

303

Default Settings ..........................................................................304
Resetting the Menus ..................................................................310
Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up Menus .......................... 310
Resetting the Custom Menu ............................................................ 311

Functions Available with Various Lens Combinations...........312
Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring] ................................................. 314

Cleaning the CMOS Sensor .......................................................315
Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor(Dust Removal) ................................................................................ 315
Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor(Dust Alert)....................................................................................... 316
Removing Dust with a Blower .......................................................... 318

Optional Accessories.................................................................320
Error Messages...........................................................................325
Troubleshooting .........................................................................328
Main Specifications ....................................................................331

11

12

Glossary ......................................................................................337
Index ............................................................................................342
WARRANTY POLICY ..................................................................348

13

Composition of the Operating ManualThis Operating Manual contains the following chapters.
1 Before Using Your Camera
Explains camera characteristics, accessories and the names and functions ofvarious parts.

2 Getting Started
Explains your first steps from purchasing the camera to taking pictures. Be sure toread this chapter and follow the instructions.

3 Basic Operations
Explains the procedures for taking and playing back pictures.

4 Shooting Functions

1
2
3
4

Explains the shooting-related functions.

5 Using the Flash5

Explains how to use the built-in flash and external flashes.

6 Shooting Settings

6

Explains the procedures for configuring image processing and setting the file format.

7 Playback Functions

7

Explains the procedures for playing back, deleting, and protecting images.

8 Processing Images
Explains the procedures for changing the image size, applying digital filters anddeveloping images taken in RAW format.

9 Changing Additional Settings
Explains the procedures for changing the camera settings, such as the monitor
display settings and the image folder naming convention.

8
9
10

10 Connecting to a Computer
Explains how to connect the camera to a computer, and includes installation
instructions and a general overview of the provided software.

11 Appendix
Explains troubleshooting, introduces optional accessories and provides various
resources.

11

14

The symbols used in this Operating Manual are explained below.

1

Indicates reference page number explaining a related operation.
Indicates useful information.
Indicates precautions to take when operating the camera.

1 Before Using Your
CameraCheck the package contents and the names and functionsof working parts before use.

W Camera Characteristics ............................ 16
Checking the Contents of the Package .............. 18
Names and Functions of Working Parts ............ 19
Display Indicators ................................................ 24
How to Change Function Settings ...................... 34

16

1

W Camera Characteristics

Before Using Your Camera• Features a 23.6×15.8 mm CMOS sensor with approximately 12.4 million
effective pixels for high precision and a wide dynamic range.
• Features Shake Reduction (SR), an image sensor shifting shake
reduction system. This enables you to capture sharp pictures withminimal camera shake regardless of the lens type.
• Features a viewfinder similar to that of a conventional 35 mm camera,
with a magnification of approximately 0.85 and field of view ofapproximately 96%, for easier image composition and manual focusing.
Also features a superimpose function in which the active AF point(s) on
the viewfinder illuminate red.
• Features a large 3.0-inch monitor with approximately 921,000 dots, awide viewing angle and brightness and color adjusting functions forhigh-precision viewing performance.
• In addition to the rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109, thecommercially available AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable
batteries or AA alkaline batteries can also be used with the optional AA
battery holder D-BH109.
• Features a Live View function for shooting while viewing the subject inreal-time on the monitor.
• Movies can be recorded by taking advantage of the lens properties. The
camera can also output a composite video signal so that you can viewrecorded images and movies on a monitor such as a TV screen.
• A user-friendly design has been implemented in various parts of thecamera. The large text size, high-contrast monitor and easy-to-use
menus make the camera easier to operate.
• The CMOS sensor features a special SP coating to prevent dust sticking
to the sensor. The Dust Removal function also shakes the CMOS
sensor for removing collected dust.
• Features Digital Filters to internally process the image in the camera.
You can use digital filters such as Color or Soft while taking pictures or
to process images after taking them.
• Features Custom Image which allows you to adjust settings while
previewing the end result of the edited image, enabling a wider range of
expression.
• Records images in the versatile JPEG format or the high quality and fully
editable RAW format. You can also select JPEG+RAW and record inboth formats simultaneously. Pictures taken in RAW format can beeasily processed internally by the camera.

• Features Sensitivity Priority mode K that automatically adjusts
aperture and shutter speed according to the set sensitivity.
• Supports infrared transmission (IrSimple/IrSS) which allows you to send
and receive image data to and from cell phones and printers.

17

Shake Reduction (SR)1

Shake Reduction (SR) on the W features a PENTAX original
system which uses magnetic force to move the image sensor at highspeeds, compensating for camera shake.
The camera may generate some operating noise when it is shaken,
such as when changing the composition of a picture. This is normal
and not a malfunction.

Before Using Your Camera

Additionally Saving as a RAW Image
When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data
still remains in the buffer memory, you can additionally save theimage in RAW format by pressing the mc button during playback.
If the image was shot using any of the following settings, thecorresponding RAW image listed is saved.
• Cross Processing RAW image without Cross Processing• Digital Filter
RAW image without filter effect• HDR Capture
RAW image with standard exposure• Multi-exposure
RAW image with Multi-exposure
The captured area (view angle) will differ between the W and 35 mm SLR
cameras even if the same lens is used because the format sizes for 35 mm film
and CMOS sensor are different.
Sizes for 35 mm film and CMOS sensor
35 mm film:
36×24 mmW CMOS sensor: 23.6×15.8 mm
The focal length of a lens used with a 35 mm camera is about 1.5 times longer
than that of the W. To shoot images with an angle of view framing the same
area, divide the focal length of the 35 mm lens by 1.5.
Example) To capture the same image as a 150 mm lens attached to a 35 mm
camera150÷1.5=100
Use a 100 mm lens with the W.
Inversely, multiply the focal length of the lens used with the W by 1.5 todetermine the focal length for 35 mm cameras.
Example) If 300 mm lens is used with the W
300×1.5=450
Focal length is equivalent to a 450 mm lens on a 35 mm camera.

18

Checking the Contents of the
Package
The following accessories are packaged with your camera.
Check that all accessories are included.

1
Before Using Your Camera

Hot shoe cover FK(Installed on camera)

Eyecup FQ(Installed on camera)

Body mount cover(Installed on camera)

USB cable
I-USB7

Strap
O-ST53

Rechargeable lithium-ion
battery D-LI109

Battery charger
D-BC109

AC plug cord

Software (CD-ROM)
S-SW110

Operating Manual(this manual)
Refer to p.320 for information on optional accessories.

Names and Functions of Working
Parts
AF assist light

Card coverLens mount index(red dot)

Hot shoe
Speaker1

Strap lug

Before Using Your Camera

Self-timer lamp/
Remote control receiver

Microphone
MirrorAF coupler

Lens unlock button

Lens information
contacts

Built-in flash

Diopteradjustment leverViewfinder

Image plane indicator

PC/AV terminal

Terminal cover

Card access lamp

MonitorInfrared port

Tripod socket

19

Battery coverunlock leverBattery cover* In the second illustration, the camera is shown with the Eyecup FQ removed.

20

Capture Mode
Functions of buttons, dials and levers used during shooting are noted.
1
Before Using Your Camera

The factory default settings are explained here. Depending on the button, thesesettings can be changed.

1

5

2

6

3

4

7

9
0
8

a
b
c
d
e
f

21
1 | (Green) button
You can assign a function tothis button. (p.197)

2 Shutter release button

3 Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
and off. (p.59)

4 Lens unlock button
Press to detach a lens. (p.57)

5 mc button
Sets the EV compensation
and aperture values. (p.104,
p.110, p.117)

6 Mode dial
Changes Capture mode. (p.91)

7 Focus mode lever
Switches between autofocus
mode (p.122) and manual
focus mode (p.134).

8 K/i button
Press to pop up the built-in
flash. (p.75)

9 E-dial
Sets the shutter speed,
aperture, sensitivity and EV
compensation values.

0 =/L button
You can select the function ofthis button either to focus on
the target or to lock the
exposure value. (p.112, p.120,
p.123)

Switches to Playback mode.
(p.82)b U button
Displays a Live View image.
(p.159)c M button
Displays the status screen(p.25)
Switches to the control panel
when the status screen isshown. (p.26)

d 4 button
When the control panel or amenu screen is displayed,press this button to confirm
the selected item.
When the focusing area is set
to S (Select), press thisbutton to enable or disablechanging the AF point. (p.129)

e Four-way controller(2345)
Displays the Drive Mode/
Flash Mode/White Balance/
Sensitivity setup menu. (p.86)
When the control panel or amenu screen is displayed, use
this to move the cursor orchange items.
Changes the AF point when it
can be changed.

f 3 button
Displays the [A Rec. Mode 1]
menu (p.87). Next, press thefour-way controller (5) todisplay other menus.

1
Before Using Your Camera

Press to capture images.
(p.72)

a Q button

22

Playback Mode
Functions of buttons, dial and lever used during playback are noted.
114Before Using Your Camera

2
3

5

6
7
8
9
0
a

23
1 | (Green) button
Press to change the settings,
such as resetting the values.
(p.197)

2 Shutter release button

3 Main switch
Move to turn the camera on
and off. (p.59)

4 mc button
When the file format of the lastcaptured image is JPEG, andits data still remains in thebuffer memory, press thisbutton to additionally save theimage in RAW format. (p.83)

5 K/i button
Press to delete images. (p.84)

6 E-dial
Use this to enlarge an image(p.223) or display multiple
images at the same time
(p.224).

Switches to Capture mode.

8 M button
Displays shooting informationon the monitor. (p.27)

9 4 button
Confirms the setting you
selected in the menu or
playback screen.

0 Four-way controller(2345)
Use this to move the cursor orchange items in the menu or
playback screen.
Press the four-way controller(3) to display the playback
mode palette. (p.220)

a 3 button
Displays the [Q Playback 1]
menu (p.221). Next, press thefour-way controller (5) todisplay other menus.

References to Button Names
In this Operating Manual, the buttons of the fourway controller are referred to in the following way.

1
Before Using Your Camera

Press halfway to switch to
Capture mode.

7 Q button

24

Display Indicators
Monitor1
Before Using Your Camera

The various information appears on
the monitor depending on the statusof the camera.

MonitorThe brightness and the color of the monitor can be adjusted. (p.277, p.278)

At Start-up or when Operating the Mode Dial
Guides appear on the monitor for 3 seconds (default setting) when thecamera is switched on or the mode dial is turned.

1

P Program
Automatic ExposureP
09/09/2010

2
1
2

Capture mode (p.91)
World Time (p.270)(only when set to Destination)

10:30AM

3
3

Current date and time (p.64)

To not show guides, set [Guide Display] to [Off] in the [R Set-up 1] menu.
(p.274)

25
Capture Mode
While shooting, the status screen is displayed showing the current
shooting function settings. You can change the type of the screen
displayed by pressing the M button.
P

AF.A

ISO

AUTO

M Bright

OFF

200
AWB
-3 2 1

1

Custom Image

F 5.6

OFF

M

M

HDR
OFF

AF.A

ISO

1 2 +3

JPEG 12M[

JPEG 12M

37][

Status screen

37]

Control panel

Blank

Status screen(All items are displayed here for explanatory purposes. The actual display may
differ.)

P

ISO

AUTO

1

AF.A

SHIFT

1/ 2000

F 2.8

1600
AWB
-3 2 1±1.0
G1A1
JPEG 12M

[

11

12

13
8
15

37]

22

1
2
3

Capture Mode (p.91)
AE Lock (p.120)
Interval Shooting (p.149)/Multiexposure (p.153)/Digital Filter(p.155)/HDR Capture (p.209)/Cross Processing (p.216)

4

Custom Image (p.213)/
Cross Processing (p.216)

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Focus Mode (p.122)
AE Metering (p.114)
Battery level (p.49)
E-dial guide
Shutter speed
Aperture value
ISO AUTO
Sensitivity (p.98)

3

9

ISO

1 2 +3

2

8

4

5
8

7

17
18

14
24

19

20

21

16
23

6
10

25

26

13 EV Compensation (p.117)/
Exposure Bracketing (p.118)
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26

EV barFlash Exposure Compensation (p.81)
White Balance fine-tuning (p.204)
Drive Mode (p.86)
White Balance (p.200)
Select AF point (p.129)
Sensitivity (p.98)
Flash Mode (p.75)
File Format (p.195)
JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.192)
JPEG Quality (p.193)
Shake Reduction (p.141)
Remaining image storage
capacity/| button guide

Before Using Your Camera

1/ 125

26

Control panel
Press the M button in the status screen to display the control panel and change
settings.

1
2

Custom Image
Bright1
Before Using Your Camera

OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

4

5

6

7

AF.A

8

9

10

11

12

JPEG 12M

13

14

15

16

17

[
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

3

Function name
Setting
Custom Image (p.213)
Cross Processing (p.216)
Digital Filter (p.155)
HDR Capture (p.209)
Shake Reduction (p.141)
AE Metering (p.114)
AF Mode (p.125)
Select AF point (p.129)

37]

18

11
12
13
14
15
16
17

19

Highlight Correction (p.207)
Shadow Correction (p.208)
File Format (p.195)
JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.192)
JPEG Quality (p.193)
Distortion Correction (p.211)
Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Correction (p.211)

18 Current date and time
19 Remaining image storage capacity• Settings that cannot be changed due to the current camera setup cannot be
selected.
• On the status screen, the setting currently being changed or guide display forthe buttons that can be operated are displayed in blue (when [Status Screen]in the [R Set-up 1] menu is set to [Display Color 1]).
• The status screen will disappear if no operations are made within 30 seconds.
Press the M button to display it again.
• If no operations are made within 30 seconds in the control panel, the status
screen will reappear.
• If [Shooting Info Display] is set to O (On) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu and the blank screen is selected, the next time the camera isturned on the blank screen is displayed first.
• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayed on
the status screen and in the control panel. Even if the number of recordable
images is 10,000 or more, [9999] is displayed.

27
Playback Mode
The camera switches the types of information display when you press the
M button during playback.
Captured image, file format and guides are displayed.

Histogram display

Captured image and histogram (Brightness/RGB) aredisplayed. Not available during movie playback. (p.30)

Detailed information Detailed information on how and when the image wasdisplaytaken is displayed. (p.28)
No info. display

Only captured image is displayed.

100-0001
RAW

100-0001
RAW

M

JPEG 1/ 2000 F5.6 ISO 200

JPEG 1/ 2000 F5.6 ISO 200

Histogram display

Standard
M

M
P

M

AF.A
1/ 2000

F5.6
ISO 200
JPEG 12M

100-0001

24mm
DR
200

+1.5

-0.5
G2A1
AdobeRGB

±0
±0
±0
±0
±0

09/09/2010 10:00AM

No info. display

Detailed information display

The type of information display that is shown first during playback is the sameas that of the last playback in the previous session. If [Playback Info Display] is
set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, the [Standard]
screen is always displayed first when the camera is turned on.

1
Before Using Your Camera

Standard

28

Detailed information display
Use the four-way controller (23) to switch between pages.
Page 1

1

Still Picture

Before Using Your Camera

P
AF.A
1/ 2000

F2.8
ISO 200
JPEG 12M

100-0001

24mm
DR
200

+1.5

-0.5
G2A1
AdobeRGB

1

3

2

4

6

5
30

7
8

9
10 11
12 13 14 15 16 17 18
19
20
21
22
23
24

±0
±0
±0
±0
±0

25

26

27

28

29

32

09/09/2010 10:00AM

31

33

Movie
3

100-0001
10min10 sec

MONO
F2.8

G2A1
OFF

Movie

2

±0
±0
±0
±0
±0

35

30

34
23

36

19

37

25

26

24

31

13 38
27

29

32

09/09/2010 10:00AM2
3
Still Picture/Movie

2
3

Page 2100-0001

5

4

1

4

2

39
39

40
41

5

29
Rotation information (p.235)
Captured image
Capture Mode (p.91)
Protect (p.240)
Folder number-File number(p.279)67
8
9Drive Mode (p.86)
Flash Mode (p.75)
Lens focal length
AF point (p.129)/
Autofocus Method (p.160)

10
11
12
13
14

Focus Mode (p.122)
AE Metering (p.114)
Shutter speed
Digital Filter (p.155)
HDR Capture (p.209)/
Multi-exposure (p.153)/
Cross Processing (p.216)

15
16
17
18

Highlight Correction (p.207)
Shadow Correction (p.208)
Distortion Correction (p.211)
Lateral Chromatic Aberration
Adjustment (p.211)

20 EV Compensation (p.117)
21 Flash Exposure Compensation(p.81)
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41

Sensitivity (p.98)
White Balance (p.200)
White Balance fine-tuning (p.204)
File Format (p.195)
Recorded Pixels (p.165, p.192)
Quality Level (p.165, p.193)
Color Space (p.205)
Shake Reduction (p.141, p.166)
Image Tone (p.213)
Custom Image parameters (p.213)
Shooting date and time
DPOF Setting (p.285)
Recording timeSound setting (p.166)
Sound type (p.165)
Drive Mode (Remote Control)
Cross Processing (p.216)
Information tampering warning
Photographer (p.283)
Copyright Holder (p.283)

19 Aperture value* For images taken with Live View, the autofocus method is displayed for indicator
9.
* Indicators 7 and 21 appear only for images taken with the flash.
* Indicators 13, 14, 15, 16, and 24 appear only for images taken with thecorresponding functions enabled.
* Indicators 26 and 27 do not appear for RAW images.

1
Before Using Your Camera

1
2
3
4
5

30

1

Histogram Display
The following histograms can be displayed when playing back still
pictures. The “Brightness histogram” shows the distribution of brightness
and the “RGB histogram” shows the distribution of color intensity. Pressthe four-way controller (23) to switch between “Brightness histogram”
and “RGB histogram”.

Before Using Your Camera

1

2

3

2

100-0001
RAW

3
100-0001

4 23

11
12

5
23

5
1/ 2000

6

7

8

9

Brightness histogram

1
2
3
4
5
6

1

13
1/ 2000

F5.6 ISO 200

106

F5.6 ISO 200

7

8

9

10

RGB histogram

Histogram (Brightness)
7 Shutter speed
Protect
8 Aperture value
Folder number-File number
9 Sensitivity
Additionally saving in RAW format 10 DPOF Setting
Switch RGB histogram/ Brightness 11 Histogram (R)histogram
12 Histogram (G)File Format
13 Histogram (B)* Indicator 2 appears only for protected images.
* Indicator 4 appears only when the file format of the last captured image isJPEG, and its data still remains in the buffer memory. (p.83)
If [Bright/Dark Area] (p.222) of the [Q Playback 1] menu is set to O (On),areas affected by bright or dark portions blink (except when in RGB histogram
display and Detailed information display).

31

1(Dark)←Brightness→ (Bright)

Dark portions

Bright portions

1 Adjusting the Exposure (p.117)
1 Adjusting Brightness (p.207)
Understanding Brightness
When the brightness is correct and there are no overly bright or darkareas, the graph peaks in the middle. If the image is too dark, the peak ison the left side, and if it is too bright, the peak is on the right side.

Dark image

Image with few brightor dark areas

Bright image

When the image is too dark, the part to the left is cut off (dark portions withno detail) and when the image is too bright, the part to the right is cut off(bright portions with no detail).
Bright portions blink red and dark portions blink yellow on the monitor
when [Bright/Dark Area] is O (On).
1 Playing Back Images (p.82)
1 Setting the Playback Display Method (p.222)
1 Setting the Display for Instant Review (p.276)
Understanding Color BalanceDistribution of color intensity is displayed for each color in the RGB histogram.
The right side of the graphs look similar for images that have White Balanceadjusted well. If only one color is lopsided to the left, that color is too intense.
1 Setting the White Balance (p.200)

Before Using Your Camera

A histogram shows the brightness
distribution of an image. The horizontal
axis represents brightness (dark at theleft and bright at the right) and the verticalaxis represents the number of pixels.
The shape and the distribution of thehistogram before and after shooting
tells you whether the exposure level
and contrast are correct or not, and lets
you decide if you need to adjust the
exposure and take a picture again.

Number of pixels→

Using the Histogram32
Guide Indicators
The following indicators appear on the monitor to indicate the keys,
buttons and e-dial that can be operated at that time.
1

Example)Before Using Your Camera

2Four-way controller (2)3 button3

Four-way controller (3)M button

4

Four-way controller (4)5Four-way controller (5)|Green button

4 buttonm

mc button

S=/L button

K/i button

E-dialShutter release button

Viewfinder
The following information appears in the viewfinder.

2

3

1

1

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12
1
2
3
4

AF frame (p.58)
Spot metering frame (p.115)
AF point (p.129)
Flash status (p.75)
Lit: when flash is available.
Blinks: when flash is recommended but not set.

33
5

6

8

9

10

11
12

• The AF point(s) in use for autofocus appear in red (Superimpose AF Area)
when the shutter release button is pressed halfway. (p.129)• [9999] is the maximum number of recordable images that can be displayedin the viewfinder. Even if the number of recordable images is 10,000 or more,[9999] is displayed.
• When [AF/AE-L Button] is set to [Cancel AF] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu,\ is displayed in the viewfinder while the =/L button is pressed.
(p.123)

1
Before Using Your Camera

7

Picture mode icon (p.92)
The icon for Picture mode in use appears.
U (Normal mode of I), = (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro),\ (Moving Object), . (Night Scene Portrait)
Shake Reduction (p.141)
Appears when the Shake Reduction function is activated.
Shutter speed
Shutter speed when capturing or adjusting.
Underlined when the shutter speed can be adjusted with the e-dial.
A countdown of processing time is displayed when the Noise Reduction
function is activated. (p.100)
Aperture value
Aperture value when capturing or adjusting.
Underlined when the aperture value can be adjusted with the e-dial.
[nr] blinks when the Noise Reduction function is activated. (p.100)
Focus indicator (p.70)
Lit: when the subject is focused.
Blinks: when the subject is not in focus.
Number of recordable images/EV compensation value
Displays the number of recordable images with current quality level andrecorded pixels.
The difference from the proper exposure value appears when the mode dial
is set to a. (p.111)
m: EV Compensation (p.117)
Underlined when the EV compensation value can be adjusted with thee-dial while the mc button is pressed.
o: Sensitivity
Underlined when the sensitivity can be adjusted with the e-dial.
Focus mode (p.122)
Appears when set to \.
AE Lock (p.120)
Appears while the AE Lock function is activated.

How to Change Function Settings

34

1

Function settings can be changed using the direct keys, control panel ormenus.
This section explains the basic ways to change function settings.

Before Using Your Camera

Using the Direct Keys
In Capture mode, you can set Drive Mode, Flash Mode, White Balanceand Sensitivity by pressing the four-way controller (2345). (p.86)
Below, how to set [Flash Mode] is explained as an example.

1

Press the four-way controller (3)in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller(45) to select a flash mode.

Flash Mode
Auto Flash Discharge

0.0
MENU Cancel

3

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

OK OK

35
When direct key operation is enabled, the guide indicators for the direct keys
are displayed in the status screen. Direct key operation is not available whenthe AF point is being changed while the focusing area is set to S (Select). In
such cases, press and hold the 4 button. (p.130)

1

While shooting, the current settings can be checked on the status screen.
You can also switch the display to the control panel and change settings.
Below, how to set [JPEG Quality] is explained as an example.

1

Check the status screen and thenpress the M button.
The control panel appears.

Press the M button when the status
screen is not displayed.

AUTO
PICT

AF.A

1/ 20

F 5.6

ISO

AUTO

800
AWB
-3 2 1[

JPEG 12M

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select an item you
want to change the setting for.
You cannot select items that cannot bechanged.

ISO

1 2 +337]

Custom Image
Bright
OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M[

37]

Before Using Your Camera

Using the Control Panel36

3

Press the 4 button.
The setup screen of the selected item
appears.

JPEG Quality

OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

1

JPEG 12M

Before Using Your Camera

[

4

5

Use the four-way controller(45) or e-dial to select a setting
value.

37]

JPEG Quality

128

MENU Cancel

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel and is ready to take a picture.
• You can also change the setting by turning the e-dial after selecting the item
you want to change in Step 2. Detailed settings such as parameters can bechanged after pressing the 4 button.
• The status screen and control panel are not displayed when Live View
(p.159) is displayed. Make or change necessary settings in the [A Rec.
Mode] menu in advance.

37

Using the Menus

1

Press the 3 button in
Capture mode.
The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu appears on
the monitor.
If the 3 button is pressed in
Playback mode, the [Q Playback 1]
menu appears. When the mode dial is set
to H (Scene), the [H Scene] menu
appears instead.

2

Press the four-way controller(5).
Each time the four-way controller (5) ispressed, the menu will change in thefollowing sequence: [A Rec. Mode 2],[A Rec. Mode 3], [A Rec. Mode 4],[Q Playback 1] ··· [A Rec. Mode 1].
You can also use the e-dial to switch themenus.

3

Use the four-way controller(23) to choose an item.

1 2 3 4

Custom Image
File Format
JPEG
JPEG Recorded Pixels 12M
JPEG Quality
AF ModeAF.A
AE Metering
Select AF PointMENU Exit

1 2 3 4

Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU Exit

OFF
OFF
HDR
OFF

ISO

NR AUTONR AUTO

1
Before Using Your Camera

This section explains how to use the menus: [A Rec. Mode],[Q Playback], [R Set-up] and [A Custom Setting] menus.
Below, how to set [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
is explained as an example.

38

4

Press the four-way controller(5).
Available settings are displayed.
The frame moves to the pop-up menu if
there is one. When there is a submenu, it
is displayed.

1
Before Using Your Camera

5

6

Use the four-way controller(23) to select a setting.

1 2 3 4

Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU Exit

OFF
OFF
HDR
OFF

ISO

NR AUTONR AUTO

1 2 3 4

Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU Cancel

OFF
OFF
HDR
OFF

NR AUTOISOONNR AUTONR OFF

OK

OK

Press the 4 button.
The setting is saved.
Press the 3 button if a submenu isdisplayed.
Next, set other items.

7

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before
selecting the menu appears again.

Even after you press the 3 button and close the menu screen, yoursettings will not be saved if the camera is turned off improperly (such as byremoving the battery while the camera is on).

39
• You can select whether to display the menu tab selected the last time first, or
to always display the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu first. (p.275)• Refer to the following pages for details on each menu.
• [A Rec. Mode] menu 1 p.87
• [Q Playback] menu 1 p.221• [R Set-up] menu 1 p.266• [A Custom Setting] menu 1 p.89

1
Before Using Your Camera

40

Memo

2 Getting Started
This chapter explains your first steps from purchasing thecamera to taking pictures. Be sure to read it and follow the
instructions.

Attaching the Strap .............................................. 42
Inserting the Battery ............................................ 43
Inserting/Removing an SD Memory Card .......... 52
Attaching a Lens .................................................. 56
Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter ....................... 58
Turning the Camera On and Off .......................... 59
Initial Settings ....................................................... 60

Attaching the Strap

42

1

Pass the end of the strap throughthe strap lug, then secure it on
the inside of the clasp.

2
Getting Started

2

Attach the other end of the strap
in the same manner as describedabove.

Inserting the Battery

43

Insert the lithium-ion battery or AA batteries into the camera.

Using the Lithium-ion Battery
2

Use the exclusive battery D-LI109.

When using the battery for the first time, or when the battery has not beenused in a long time, or when [Battery depleted] appears, recharge thebattery.
Note: AC plug cord “Listed, Type SPT-2 or NISPT-2, 18/2 flexible
cord, rated 125 V, 7A, minimum 6ft (1.8m)”

12Connect the AC plug cord to the battery charger.
Plug the AC plug cord into the power outlet.
Indicator lamp

AC plug cordBattery charger

Getting Started

Charging the Battery

44

3Face the 2 mark on the
exclusive battery up and insert it
into the battery charger.
First, insert the battery at an angle, as
shown in the illustration, and then pushdown on the battery until it clicks.
The indicator lamp is lit during charging
and turns off when the battery is fully
charged.

2
Getting Started

4

When the battery is fully charged, remove the battery fromthe battery charger.
• Do not use the provided Battery Charger D-BC109 to charge batteries otherthan rechargeable lithium-ion battery D-LI109. Charging other batteries may
cause damage or heating.
• If the battery is correctly oriented and inserted into the battery charger but theindicator lamp is not lit, the battery is faulty. Use a new battery in the camera.
• The maximum charging time is approximately 240 minutes (it depends on
temperature and remaining battery power). Charge in a location where thetemperature is between 0°C and 40°C.
• If battery usage time is reduced even when properly charged, the battery hasreached the end of its life. Use a new battery in the camera.

45
Inserting/Removing the Battery

1

Slide the battery cover unlock
lever in the direction of the arrow(1) to open the battery cover
(2).

2

1

2

Face the 2 mark on the battery
towards outside of the camera,
push the battery lock lever in the
direction of the arrow (3) andinsert the battery.
To remove the battery, push the battery
lock lever in the direction of the arrow (3)with your finger. Remove the battery
when it pops out slightly.

3

2
Getting Started• Do not open the battery cover or remove the battery while the power is on.
• Remove the battery when you will not use the camera for a long while. The
battery may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you install a new battery
after a long time has passed since the battery was removed, follow theprocedure for “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).
• Insert the battery correctly. If the battery is inserted incorrectly, it may not be
removed. Wipe the electrodes of the battery with a soft dry cloth before
inserting.
• Be careful as the camera or battery may become hot when the camera isused continuously for a long period of time.

46

3

Close the battery cover.

2
Getting Started

Using the AA Batteries
When using AA batteries, be sure to use the optional AA battery holder
D-BH109. (p.320)
Use four AA lithium batteries, AA Ni-MH rechargeable batteries, or AA
alkaline batteries.
Available Batteries

Characteristics

AA lithium batteries

Recommended when using the camera in cold climates.

AA Ni-MHrechargeable
batteries

These are rechargeable and are economical.
A commercially available battery charger that iscompatible with the batteries is required.

These are easily obtainable when the batteries you areusing run out but they may not support all the camera
AA alkaline batteries functions under certain conditions. We do not recommend
using them except in emergencies or when checking thecamera functionality.

47

1

2

Insert the AA batteries according
to the +/– indicators in thebattery holder.

Slide the battery cover unlock
lever in the direction of the arrow(1) to open the battery cover
(2).

2

1

2
Getting Started• Do not use the Ni-Mn batteries as the batteries’ voltage characteristics may
cause a malfunction.
• AA lithium batteries and AA alkaline batteries that can be used in this camera
are not rechargeable.
• Do not open the battery cover or remove the batteries while the power is on.
• Remove the batteries when you do not plan to use the camera for a long time.
If you leave them in the camera for a long time, they may leak.
• If the date and time settings have been reset when you install new batteries
after a long time has passed since the batteries were removed, follow theprocedure for “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).
• Insert the batteries correctly. Batteries inserted incorrectly may cause acamera breakdown. Wipe the electrodes of the batteries before inserting.
• Replace all the batteries at the same time and do not mix battery types,
brands or old batteries with new ones. Otherwise, malfunctions, such as thebattery level not being displayed properly, may occur.

48

3

Insert the battery holder into thebattery chamber.
Push the battery lock lever in the
direction of the arrow (3) and insert thebattery holder until it locks.
To remove the battery holder, push thebattery lock lever in the direction of thearrow (3) with your finger. Remove thebattery holder when it pops out slightly.

2
Getting Started

4

3

Close the battery cover.

• To use the AA batteries, set the AA battery type in [AA Battery Type] of the[R Set-up 3] menu before use. (p.282)• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when using
the camera for a prolonged period. (p.50)• Check the orientation of the batteries if the camera does not operateproperly.

49

Battery Level Indicator
You can confirm remaining battery level by checking the w displayed on
the status screen.
Status Screen

Battery Level

w (Green)

Battery is full.

x (Green)

Battery is close to full. (D-LI109 only)f (Orange)

Battery is running low. (D-BH109 only)y (Yellow)

Battery is running low. (D-LI109 only)z (Red)Battery is almost empty.

[Battery depleted]

The camera turns off after displaying the message.

2

Approximate Image Storage Capacity and Playback
Time (Fully Charged Battery/New AA Batteries)
Battery
D-LI109

Temperature

NormalRecordingFlash Photography
50% Use100% Use

Playback
Time

23°C

560 images 470 images 400 images 300 minutes

0°C

420 images 340 images 280 images 240 minutes

AA lithium
batteries

23°C

AA Ni-MHrechargeable
batteries(1900mAh)
AA alkaline
batteries

1600
images1000
images890 images

620
minutes

23°C

610 images 400 images 300 images

330
minutes

23°C

200 images 120 images 90 images

270
minutes

The image storage capacity (normal recording and flash use 50%) is based on
measuring conditions in accordance with CIPA standards, while other data isbased on our measuring conditions. Some deviation from the above figures may
occur in actual use depending on shooting mode and shooting conditions.

Getting Started

f, y or z (Red) may appear even when the battery level is sufficientif the camera is used at low temperatures or when performing continuous
shooting for a long period of time. In this situation, turn the camera off and on
again. If w (Green) appears, you can use the camera.

50• Battery performance temporarily decreases as the temperature decreases.
When using the camera in cold climates, have extra batteries at hand andkeep them warm in your pocket. Battery performance will return to normalwhen returned to room temperature.
• Have extra batteries ready when traveling overseas, taking pictures in cold
climates, or taking a lot of pictures.

Using the AC Adapter (Optional)

2
Getting Started

We recommend the use of the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) whenusing the monitor for a long time or when connecting the camera to acomputer or AV device.

1
2

Make sure the camera is turned off.
Open the battery cover.
Refer to Step 1 on p.45.
Remove the battery if it is inserted into
the camera.

2

1

3

Insert the DC coupler into thebattery chamber.
Push the battery lock lever in the
direction of the arrow (1) and insert the
DC coupler until it locks.
To remove the DC coupler, push thebattery lock lever in the direction of thearrow (1) with your finger. Remove theDC coupler when it pops out slightly.

1

4

51
Close the battery cover.
The DC coupler’s connection cable ispulled out from the battery cover.

Connect the DC terminals on the AC adapter and the DC
coupler with the 2 marks aligned.

7
5
6

6
7

Connect the AC plug cord to the AC adapter.
Plug the AC cord into the power outlet.
• Make sure the camera is turned off before connecting or disconnecting theAC adapter.
• Make sure connections are secure between the terminals. SD Memory Cardor data may be corrupted if disconnected while the card is being accessed.
• The connection cable will protrude from the battery cover while the AC
adapter is in use. Be careful as you will not be able to set the camera uprighton a table, etc.
Be sure to read the manual of the AC adapter kit K-AC109 when using the AC
adapter.

Getting Started

52Inserting/Removing an SD Memory
Card

52

This camera uses either an SD Memory Card or an SDHC Memory Card(commercially available). Both cards are referred to as SD Memory Cards
hereafter. Make sure the camera is turned off before inserting or removing
the SD Memory Card.
2
Getting Started• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while the card access lamp is lit.
• If the card cover is opened while the power is on, the camera will turn off. Do
not open the cover while the camera is in use.
• Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unused or
has been used on other cameras or digital devices. Refer to “Formatting an
SD Memory Card” (p.268) for details on formatting.
• Use a high-speed memory card when recording movies. If a write speed
cannot keep up with a recording speed, the writing may stop during
recording.

1
2Make sure that the camera is turned off.
Slide the card cover in the
direction of the arrow and thenlift it to open (1→2).

1
2

3

Insert the card all the way with
the SD Memory Card label facing
toward the monitor.

53

Push the SD Memory Card in once toremove.

Close the card cover (3) andthen slide it in the direction of thearrow (4).

2

43Precautions When Using the SD Memory Card
• The SD Memory Card is equipped with awrite-protect switch. Setting the switch to
LOCK prevents new data from being
recorded on the card, the stored data fromWrite-protect
being deleted, and the card from being
switchformatted by the camera or computer.
• The SD Memory Card may be hot when removing the card immediately afterusing the camera.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card or turn off the power while the card isbeing accessed. This may cause the data to be lost or the card to be damaged.
• Do not bend the SD Memory Card or subject it to violent impact. Keep it awayfrom water and store away from high temperatures.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may bedamaged and become unusable.
• Data on the SD Memory Card may be deleted in the following circumstances.
We do not accept any liability for data that is deleted if(1) the SD Memory Card is mishandled by the user.
(2) the SD Memory Card is exposed to static electricity or electrical interference.
(3) the SD Memory Card has not been used for a long time.
(4) the SD Memory Card or the battery is removed while the card is being
accessed.

Getting Started

4

54

2
Getting Started• If the SD Memory Card is not used for a long time, the data on the card may
become unreadable. Be sure to regularly make a backup of important data on
a computer.
• Avoid using or storing the card where it may be exposed to static electricity orelectrical interference.
• Avoid using or storing the card in direct sunlight or in locations where it may be
exposed to rapid changes in temperature or to condensation.
• Format new SD Memory Cards. Also format SD Memory Cards used with othercameras.
1 Formatting an SD Memory Card (p.268)• The data on your SD Memory Card should be managed at your own risk.

Recorded Pixels and Quality Level
When the File Format is JPEG
Choose the number of recorded pixels (size) and quality level (JPEG datacompression rate) of pictures according to how you intend to use thepictures you have taken.
Pictures with larger recorded pixels or more stars (E) are clearer whenprinted. However, the number of pictures that can be taken (the number of
pictures that can be recorded on an SD Memory Card) decreases withlarger file sizes.
The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on the quality
level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety of otherfactors so you do not need to select more than the required number ofpixels. For example, to print in postcard size, i (1728×1152) isadequate. Set the appropriate recorded pixels and quality level depending
on how the picture will be used.
1 Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels (p.192)
1 Setting the JPEG Quality Level (p.193)

JPEG Recorded Pixels, JPEG Quality and Approximate Image
Storage Capacity

55(When using a 2 GB SD Memory Card)
JPEG Quality

JPEG Rec. Pixels

C
Best

D
BetterE
Good(4288×2848)

281

495

975

J

(3936×2624)

332

585

1138

P

(3072×2048)

543

945

1807

i

(1728×1152)

1617

2793

5121

• The number of storable images may vary depending on the subject, shooting
conditions, shooting mode and SD Memory Card, etc.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders containing 500 images each. However, in Exposure
Bracketing, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting iscompleted, even if the number of images exceeds 500.

When the File Format is RAW
With the W, you can record in the versatile JPEG format or the highquality and editable RAW format. For RAW file format, you can select
PENTAX’s original PEF format or general-purpose DNG (Digital Negative)
format designed by Adobe Systems. On a 2 GB SD Memory Card, you canrecord up to 98 images in both PEF and DNG formats.
1 Setting the File Format (p.195)

2
Getting Started

E

Attaching a Lens

56

2

Attach a proper lens to the camera’s body.
When you use one of the following lenses with the W, all the camera’s
capture modes will be available.
(a) DA, DA L, D FA, FA J lenses(b) Lenses with an s (Auto) position, when used in the s position

Getting Started

Turn the camera off before attaching or removing the lens to prevent
unexpected lens movement.
• When lenses described in (b) are used in a position other than s, somefunctions will be restricted. Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]”(p.314).
• With factory default settings, the camera will not work with lenses other thanthose listed above and accessories. Set [22. Using Aperture Ring] to[Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to use them. (p.314)

1
2

Check that the camera is turned off.
Remove the body mount cover(1) and lens mount cover (2).
Be sure to put the lens down with the lens
mount side facing upward to protect thelens mount from damage.

3

Align the Lens mount index (reddots: 3) on the camera and thelens, and secure by turning thelens clockwise until it clicks.
After attaching, turn the lenscounterclockwise to check that the lens islocked in place.

3

4

57
Remove the front lens cap bypushing the indicated portions
inward.

2
Getting Started

To detach the lens, hold down the lensunlock button (4) and turn the lenscounterclockwise.

4• We assume no responsibility nor liability for accidents, damages andmalfunctions resulting from the use of lenses made by other manufacturers.
• The camera body and lens mount incorporate lens information contacts andan AF coupler. Dirt, dust, or corrosion may damage the electrical system.
When necessary, clean the contacts with a soft dry cloth.
The body mount cover (1) is a cover to prevent scratches and block dust whenshipped. Body Mount Cap K is sold separately and has a lock function.

Adjusting the Viewfinder Diopter

58

Adjust the viewfinder diopter to suit your eyesight.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image clearly, slide the diopter
adjustment lever sideways.
You can adjust the diopter from approximately –2.5 to +1.5 m–1.
2
Getting Started

1

Look through the viewfinder andslide the diopter adjustment
lever left or right.
Adjust the lever until the AF frame in the
viewfinder is focused.
Point the camera at a white wall or otherbright and consistent surface.

AF frame• The Eyecup F Q is attached to the viewfinder portion when the camera leaves
the factory. Diopter can be adjusted with the Eyecup FQ attached. However,adjustment is easier with the eyecup removed.
• To remove the Eyecup FQ, pull it out in the
direction of the arrow.
To attach the Eyecup F Q, align it with thegroove on the viewfinder eyepiece andpush it into the position.
• If it is difficult to see the viewfinder image
clearly even if you use the diopter
adjustment lever, use the optional diopter
correction lens adapter M. However, theEyecup FQ must be removed to use thisadapter. (p.323)

Turning the Camera On and Off

159

Turn the main switch to [ON].
The camera will turn on.
Set the main switch to the position [OFF]to turn off the camera.

Getting Started• Always turn the camera off when not in use.
• The power will automatically turn off when you do not perform any operations
within a set period of time. To reactivate the camera, turn it on again or
perform any of the following.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
- Press the Q button, 3 button, or M button.
• By default, the camera is set to turn off automatically after 1 minute ofinactivity. You can change the setting in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]
menu. (p.281)

2

Initial Settings

60

2
Getting Started

The first time the camera is turned on after
purchasing, the [Language/u] screen
appears on the monitor. Follow theprocedure below to set the language
displayed on the monitor and the current
date and time. Once these settings are
made, you will not need to set them again
next time you turn on your camera.
If the [Date Adjustment] screen appears, set
the date and time by following the procedurein “Setting the Date and Time” (p.64).

MENU Cancel

OK OK

Date Adjustment
Date Format

mm / dd / yy 24h

Date

01 / 01 / 2010

Time

00 : 00
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

Setting the Display Language
You can choose the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed from the following: English, French, German, Spanish,Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech,
Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.

1

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select the desired
language.

MENU Cancel

OK OK

2

61
Press the 4 button.
The [Initial Setting] screen appears in theselected language.
Press the four-way controller (3) twiceand proceed to Step 10 on p.62 if
W (Hometown) does not have to bechanged.

EnglishNew York
Text Size

Standard

Settings complete
MENU Cancel

2

Press the four-way controller (3).

Getting Started

3

Initial Setting

The cursor moves to W.

4

Press the four-way controller (5).
The [W Hometown] screen appears.

5

Use the four-way controller(45) to select a city.

Hometown

New York
DST
MENU Cancel

6

Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [DST] (daylight saving time).

7
8

Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Initial Setting] screen.

9

Press the four-way controller (3).
The cursor moves to [Text Size].

OK OK

62

10 Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select [Standard] or[Large].

Selecting [Large] increases the text sizeof the selected menu items.

2

Initial Setting
EnglishNew York
Text Size

Standard
Large
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

Getting Started

11 Press the 4 button.
12 Press the four-way controller (3)to select [Settings complete].

OK OK

Initial Setting
EnglishNew York
Text Size

Standard

Settings complete
MENU Cancel

OK OK

13 Press the 4 button.
The [Date Adjustment] screen appears.
In this manual, the menu screens hereafter are described with [Text Size] set
to [Standard].

63
When the Wrong Language is Set
If you mistakenly select the wrong language in the [Language/u]
screen and proceed to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can performthe following operation to set the language back.
If you have proceeded to switch the camera to Capture mode (and thecamera is ready to take a picture), perform the following operation from
Step 2 to set the language back.

1

3
4
5
6

The screen shown on the right is an
example of the guides displayed. The
displayed screen will vary depending on
the selected language.
The guides appear on the monitor for 3
seconds.

P ࡊࡠࠣ࡜ࡓ⥄േ㔺಴P
2010/01/01

00:00

Press the 3 button once.
[A 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
H is displayed when the mode dial is set to H.

Press the four-way controller (5) five times.
[R 1] is displayed in the upper tab.
Press the four-way controller (5) six times when the mode dial is set toH.

Press the four-way controller (3) to select [Language/u].
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [Language/u] screen appears.

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select thedesired language and press the 4 button.
The [R Set-up 1] menu in the selected language appears.
Refer to the following pages and set the desired city for [Hometown]
and the current date and time as necessary.
• To change the hometown: “Setting the World Time” (p.270)• To change the date and time: “Changing the Date and Time Display”(p.270)• When the hometown and the date and time are not set, the [Initial Setting]screen or [Date Adjustment] screen will be displayed again next time thecamera is turned on.
• If you have not proceeded to the [Date Adjustment] screen, you can reselecta language using the four-way controller (5) in the [Language/u] screen.

2
Getting Started

2

Press the 3 button once todisplay the guides on the monitor.

64

Setting the Date and Time
Set the current date and time and the display style.

1

Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [mm/dd/yy].

2
Getting Started

2

Use the four-way controller(23) to choose the date format.
Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd].

Date Adjustment
Date Format

mm / dd / yy 24h

Date

01 / 01 / 2010

Time

00 : 00
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

3

OK OK

Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to [24h].

4

Use the four-way controller(23) to select 24h (24-hour
display) or 12h (12-hour display).

Date Adjustment
Date Format

mm / dd / yy 24h

Date

01 / 01 / 2010

Time

00 : 00
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

5

Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame returns to [Date Format].

6

Press the four-way controller (3).
The frame moves to [Date].

OK OK

7

65
Press the four-way controller (5).
The frame moves to the month.

8

Use the four-way controller (23)to set the month.

9

Press the four-way controller (3)to select [Settings complete].

mm / dd / yy 24h

Date

01 / 01 / 2010

Time

00 : 00

2

Settings complete
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Date Adjustment
Date Format

mm / dd / yy 24h

Date

09 / 09 / 2010

Time

00 : 00
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

OK OK

10 Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the status screen and is ready to take a picture.
If you set the date and time from the menu, the screen will return to the[R Set-up 1] menu. In this case, press the 3 button.
Pressing the 3 button while setting the date and time cancels the settings
made up to that point and switches the camera to Capture mode. After initial
settings are complete, if the camera power is turned off before the date andtime settings are complete, the [Date Adjustment] screen will appear first nexttime you turn the camera on. In this case, you can also set the date and timefrom the menu later. (p.270)• When you press the 4 button in Step 10, the seconds value is set to 0. To
set the exact time, press the 4 button when the time signal (on the TV,
radio, etc.) reaches 0 seconds.
• You can change the language and date and time settings from the menu.
(p.270, p.273)

Getting Started

Set the day and year in the same manner.
Next, set the time.
If you select [12h] in Step 4, the camera
switches between am and pm dependingon the time.

Date Adjustment
Date Format

66

Memo

3 Basic Operations
This chapter explains basic operations for shooting by
setting mode dial to I (Auto Picture) to ensure
successful capturing.
For information about advanced functions and settings fortaking pictures, refer to chapter 4 and onward.

Basic Shooting Operation ................................... 68
Using a Zoom Lens .............................................. 74
Using the Built-in Flash ....................................... 75
Playing Back Pictures .......................................... 82

68

Basic Shooting Operation

Holding the Camera
How you hold the camera is important when taking pictures.
• Hold the camera firmly with both hands and keep your elbows close
to your body.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture.
3
Basic Operations
Horizontal position

Vertical position• To reduce camera shake, support your body or the camera on a solid object
such as a table, tree, or wall.
• Although there are individual differences among photographers, the slowest
possible shutter speed for a handheld camera is generally 1/(focal length×1.5). For example, it is 1/75 of a second for a focal length of 50 mm and 1/
150 of a second for 100 mm. Use a tripod or the Shake Reduction function(p.141) when using a slower shutter speed.
• When using a telephoto lens, a tripod that is heavier than the total weight ofthe camera and lens is recommended to avoid camera shake.
• Do not use the Shake Reduction function when using the camera on a tripod.
(p.142)

69

Letting the Camera Choose the Optimal Settings
The W features various capture modes, focus modes, and drive
modes for expressing your photographic vision. This section explains how
to take pictures by simply pressing the shutter release button.

1

Set the mode dial to I.
The camera will select the optimal
capture mode for the subject.
1 Selecting the Appropriate Capture
Mode (p.91)

Basic Operations

2

3

Set the focus mode lever to =.
The focus mode changes to =(Autofocus) mode.
When the shutter release button ispressed halfway in =, the camera
focuses automatically. (p.122)

3

Look through the viewfinder toview the subject.
A zoom lens can be used to change thesize of the subject in the viewfinder.
(p.74)
MF
AF

70

4

Position the subject inside theAF frame and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The
focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when the subject comes into
focus.
When set to I (Auto Picture) mode,the optimal capture mode is automaticallyselected from U (Standard),= (Portrait), s (Landscape), q (Macro),\ (Moving Object) or . (Night Scene
Portrait).
The built-in flash pops up automaticallywhen necessary.
1 Operating the shutter release buttonFlash
status(p.72)
1 Subjects that are difficult to focus on(p.73)
1 Using the Built-in Flash (p.75)
1 Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point) (p.129)

3
Basic Operations

5

Press the shutter release button
fully.
The picture is taken.
This action is referred to as "releasing the
shutter" or "release".

Focus indicator671
Review the captured image on
the monitor.
The image appears for 1 second on themonitor shortly after capturing (InstantReview).
1 Setting the Display for InstantReview (p.276)
You can magnify the image during InstantReview with the e-dial. (p.223)
You can delete the image during InstantReview by pressing the K/i button.
Delete• You can set the camera so that pressing the =/L button will focus
automatically, in the same way as pressing the shutter release button
halfway. (p.123)• You can preview the image in the viewfinder or on the monitor and check thecomposition, exposure, and focus before taking pictures. (p.137)

Basic Operations

1 Deleting a Single Image (p.84)

3

72
Operating the shutter release button
The shutter release button has two working positions.

Not pressed

3

Pressed halfway Pressed fully(first position) (second position)

Basic Operations

Pressing it down halfway (first position) displays the indicators in the
viewfinder and the autofocus system operates. Pressing it fully(second position) takes a picture.
• Press the shutter release button gently when taking a picture to prevent
camera shake.
• Practice pressing the shutter release button halfway/fully to learn
where the first position and second position are.
• The viewfinder indicators are displayed while the shutter release button
is pressed halfway. The indicators are displayed for about 10 seconds(default setting) while the exposure metering timer is on after you takeyour finger off the button. (p.32, p.116)

73
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
The autofocus mechanism is not perfect. Focusing may be difficult
when taking pictures under the following conditions. These also apply
to manual focusing using the focus indicator ] in the viewfinder.

If the subject cannot be focused automatically, set the focus modelever to \ and use the manual focus mode to focus on the subject
with the aid of the matte field in the viewfinder. (p.135)
The subject may not be focused even when the ] (focus indicator) is
displayed when (e) and (f) above apply.

3
Basic Operations(a) Extremely low-contrast subjects such as a white wall in thefocusing area(b) Subjects which do not reflect much light within the focusingarea(c) Fast moving objects(d) Strongly reflected light or strong backlighting (brightbackground)(e) If repeating vertical or horizontal line patterns appear within
the focusing area(f) Multiple subjects in the foreground and background within thefocusing area

Using a Zoom Lens

74

Enlarge the subject (telephoto) or capture a wider area (wide angle) witha zoom lens. Adjust the subject to the desired size and take pictures.

1
3

Turn the zoom ring to the right orleft.
Turn the zoom ring clockwise fortelephoto and counterclockwise for wide
angle.

Basic Operations

MF
AF

Wide Angle

Telephoto• The smaller the number displayed for the focal length, the wider the angle.
The larger the number, the more magnified the image appears.
• Power Zoom functions (Image Size Tracking, Zoom Clip, and Auto Zoom
Effect) are not compatible with this camera.

Using the Built-in Flash75

Use the following procedures to take pictures in low light or backlit
conditions and when you want to use the built-in flash.
The built-in flash is optimum for a subject at a distance from 0.7 m to 5 m.
Exposure will not be properly controlled and vignetting (darkening of thecorners of the image due to a lack of light) may occur when used at a
distance closer than 0.7 m (this distance varies slightly depending on thelens being used and the set sensitivity (p.178)).

Vignetting may occur depending on the lens being used and thecapture conditions. We recommend taking a test shot to check thecompatibility.
1 Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash (p.179)• When using the built-in flash, remove the lens hood before shooting.
• The built-in flash fully discharges for lenses without a function to set thelens aperture ring to s (Auto).

For details on the built-in flash and instructions on how to take pictures with an
external flash, refer to the “Using the Flash” (p.173).

Setting the Flash Mode
Flash Mode

Auto FlashC Discharge

Function
The camera automatically measures the ambient lightand determines whether to use the flash. The flash
pops up and discharges automatically when necessary,such as when using a shutter speed which is likely tocause camera shake or in backlit conditions (except
when in s (Landscape), \ (Moving Object) or l
(Night Snap) in H (Scene) mode). The flash may pop
up but may not discharge if the camera determines thatthe flash is not necessary.

Manual Flash

Discharges the flash manually. Discharges when the
flash is popped up, does not discharge when retracted.

Auto Flash+Red-

Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before theautomatic flash.

b Discharge

i eye Reduction

3
Basic Operations

Compatibility of built-in flash and lens76Flash Mode
Manual Flash+
D Red-eye
Reduction

Function
Discharges the flash manually. A pre-flash for red-eye
reduction is discharged before the main flash.
Sets to a slow shutter speed depending on thebrightness. For example, when using this to shoot a

G Slow-speed Sync portrait with the sunset in the background, both theperson and the background are captured beautifully.
Slow-speed Sync+ Discharges a pre-flash for red-eye reduction before the
H Red-eyemain flash is discharged with Slow-speed Sync.

3
Basic Operations

I Trailing Curtain
k SyncDischarges the flash immediately before closing the
shutter curtain. Captures moving objects as if they areleaving a trail behind. (p.176)

r Wireless Mode

You can synchronize a dedicated external flash(AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) without using a sync cord.
(p.183)

The flash modes that can be selected differ depending on the capture
mode.
Capture Mode
I/=/s/q/\/./H *1

Selectable Flash Mode
C/b/i/D/r

e/K/c

E/F/G/H/I/r

b/a

E/F/k/r*1 This can be selected in Q (Surf & Snow), K (Food), l (Night Snap), R (Kids), and Y(Pet) of H mode.

1

Press the four-way controller (3)in Capture mode.
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.
The flash modes that can be selected forthe set capture mode appear.

2

77
Use the four-way controller(45) to select a flash mode.

Flash Mode
Auto Flash Discharge

Turn the e-dial to perform the flash
exposure compensation. (p.81)
0.0
MENU Cancel

3

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

3
Basic Operations

Using Auto Flash Discharge Mode C, i
(Automatic Flash Pop-up)

1

Set the mode dial to I, =, q, . or H.
The flash is deactivated when A (Night Scene), K (Sunset), n (Stage
Lighting), Z (Night Scene HDR), U (Candlelight), or E (Museum) is
selected in H (Scene) mode. The built-in flash does not pop up when
set to l (Night Snap) in H (Scene) mode.

2

Press the shutter release button
halfway.
The built-in flash pops up if necessary
and begins charging. When the flash is
fully charged, b appears in the
viewfinder. (p.32)

3

Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.

78

4

Push down on the portion
indicated in the illustration to
retract the built-in flash.

Switch between C (Auto Flash Discharge) and b (Manual Flash Discharge)
by pressing the K/i button while the built-in flash is popped up.

3
Basic Operations

Using Manual Flash Discharge Mode b, D

1

Press the K/i button.

The built-in flash pops up and begins
charging. The b mode is usedregardless of the flash mode setting.
When the flash is fully charged,
b appears in the viewfinder. (p.32)

2

Press the shutter release button fully.
The flash discharges and the picture is taken.

3

Push the built-in flash down to retract.

79
When the mode dial is set to a (Flash Off), the built-in flash will not pop up
even if the K/i button is pressed.

Using red-eye reduction flash“Red-eye” is the phenomenon where eyes look reddish in
photographs taken in dark environments with a flash. This is causedby the reflection of the electronic flash in the retina of the eye.
Red-eye occurs because pupils are dilated in dark environments.
This phenomenon cannot be averted but the following measures canbe used to combat it.

3• Brighten the surroundings when shooting.
• Set to wide angle and move closer to the subject if a zoom lensis in use.
• Use a flash that supports red-eye reduction.
• Position the flash as far away from the camera as possible whenusing an external flash.

Basic Operations

The red-eye reduction function on this camera reduces a red-eye
effect by discharging the flash twice. With the red-eye reduction
function, the pre-flash is discharged just before the shutter isreleased. This reduces pupil dilation. The main flash is thendischarged while the pupils are smaller, reducing the red-eye effect.
To use the red-eye reduction function in Picture mode or H (Scene)mode, select D or F. Set to F or H in other modes.

80Daylight-Sync Shooting
In daylight conditions, the flash will eliminate shadows when a portrait
picture is taken with a shadow cast on a person’s face. Use of the
flash in this way is called Daylight-Sync Shooting. The b (Manual
Flash Discharge) mode is used when shooting with Daylight-Sync
Shooting.

3
Basic Operations

Taking pictures
1 Pop up the built-in flash manually and confirm that the flash
mode is set to E. (p.78)
2 Confirm that the flash is fully charged.
3 Take a picture.

Without Daylight-Sync

With Daylight-Sync

The picture may be overexposed if the background is too bright.

81

Compensating Flash Output
You can change the flash output in a range of –2.0 to +1.0. The following
flash compensation values can be set according to the step interval set in[1. EV Steps] (p.118) of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
Step Interval–2.0, –1.7, –1.3, –1.0, –0.7, –0.3, 0.0, +0.3, +0.7, +1.0

1/2 EV–2.0, –1.5, –1.0, –0.5, 0.0, +0.5, +1.0

3Turn the e-dial in the [Flash Mode]
screen.
The flash compensation value isdisplayed. Press the | button to reset the
flash output compensation value to 0.0.
(Available only when [Green Button] is
assigned to the | button in [Green Button]of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu) (p.197).)

Flash Mode
Manual Flash Discharge+0.3
MENU Cancel

OK OK• When the flash output exceeds its maximum amount, the compensation will
not be effective even if the compensation value is set to the plus (+) side.
• Compensating to the minus (–) side may not affect the image if the subject is
too close, the aperture value is small or sensitivity is high.
• The flash output compensation is also effective for external flash units which
support P-TTL auto flash mode.

Enabling Shooting while Charging the FlashYou can set the camera to enable
shooting while the flash is being
charged.
Set [16. Release While Charging] to [On]in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu
(p.90).
By default, pictures cannot be taken
while the built-in flash is charging.

16. Release While Charging
1 Off
2 On

Enables shutter release
while the built-in
flash is charging
OK OK
MENU Cancel

Basic Operations

1

Flash Compensation Value

1/3 EVPlaying Back Pictures

82

Playing Back Images
You can play back captured images with the camera.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software to play backpictures using a computer. Refer to “Using the Provided Software” (p.296) for
details on the software.

3
Basic Operations

1

Press the Q button.
The camera enters Playback mode andthe most recently captured image (image
with the highest file number) is displayedon the monitor. (For movies, only the first
frame is displayed on the monitor.)
Press the M button during playback
to switch the information display such asshooting information for the displayed
image.
Refer to p.27 for details about display
information.

2

Press the four-way controller(45).
4: Displays the previous image.
5: Displays the next image.

83• Refer to “Playback Functions” (p.219) for details on the playback mode
functions.
• When the file format of the last captured image is JPEG, and its data still
remains in the buffer memory, you can additionally save the image in RAW
format by pressing the mc button.
If the image was shot using any of the following settings, the corresponding
RAW image listed is saved.
• Multi-exposure
RAW image with Multi-exposure• Digital Filter
RAW image without filter effect• HDR Capture
RAW image with standard exposure• Cross Processing RAW image without Cross Processing

3
Basic Operations

84

Deleting a Single Image
You can delete images one by one.
• Deleted images cannot be restored.
• Protected images cannot be deleted. (p.240)

13
Basic Operations

2

Press the Q button and use the four-way controller (45)to select an image to delete.
Press the K/i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Delete].

100-0105

Select a file format to delete for images
saved in RAW+ format.
1

4

Delete JPEG

Deletes only the JPEG
image.

Delete RAW

Deletes only the RAW
image.

DeleteRAW+JPEG

Deletes images in both
file formats.

DeleteCancel
OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The image is deleted.
When deleting multiple images at once, refer to “Deleting Multiple Images”(p.236)

4 Shooting Functions
This chapter describes the various basic and advanced
shooting functions available with the W.

How to Operate the Shooting Functions ........... 86
Selecting the Appropriate Capture Mode .......... 91
Setting the Exposure ........................................... 96
Focusing ............................................................. 122
Checking the Composition, Exposure andFocus Before Shooting (Preview) ..................... 137
Using the Shake Reduction Function toPrevent Camera Shake ...................................... 141
Taking Pictures Continuously .......................... 149
Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters ................ 155
Shooting with Live View .................................... 159
Recording Movies .............................................. 165

86

How to Operate the Shooting
Functions
You can change capture-related settings using the direct keys, control
panel, [A Rec. Mode] menu or [A Custom Setting] menu.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.37).

Direct Keys Setting Items
4

Press the four-way controller (2345) in
Capture mode to set the following items.

Shooting Functions

Key

Item

Function

Page

2

Drive Mode

Selects Continuous shooting, Selftimer, Remote Control or Exposure
Bracketing shooting.

p.149
p.145
p.147
p.118

3

Flash Mode

Sets the method of flash discharge.

p.75

4

White Balance

Adjusts the color balance to match thetype of the light source illuminating the
subject.

p.200

5Sensitivity

Sets the ISO sensitivity.

p.98

87

Rec. Mode Menu Setting Items
The following settings can be performed inthe [A Rec. Mode 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture mode todisplay the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.

A1

Item

Function

Page

Custom Image *1

Sets the image finishing tone such as colorand contrast before shooting an image.

p.213

4

File Format *1

Sets the file format.

p.195

Shooting Functions

Menu

JPEG Recorded Sets the recording size of images saved in
Pixels *1
JPEG format.

p.192

JPEG Quality *1

Sets the quality of images saved in JPEG
format.

p.193

AF ModeSelects the autofocus mode.

p.125

Selects the part of the viewfinder to use formeasuring brightness and determining
exposure.

p.114

*1

AE Metering *1

Select AF Point *1 Selects the part of the viewfinder to focus on. p.129

A2

Cross
Processing *1

Changes the hues and contrast by
performing digital cross processing.

p.216

Digital Filter *1

Applies a digital filter effect when taking
pictures.

p.155

HDR Capture *1

Enables capturing images at high dynamic
range.

p.209

Multi-exposure

Creates a composite picture by taking
multiple frames.

p.153

Interval Shooting

Takes pictures at a set interval from a set
time.

p.151

High-ISO NR

Sets whether to use Noise Reduction whenshooting with a high ISO sensitivity.

p.100

Slow Shutter
Speed NR

Sets whether to use Noise Reduction in slow
speed shooting.

p.102

88
Menu

A3

4

Item

Function

Page

Shooting Functions

Movie

Sets the movie settings.

p.165

Live View

Sets the Live View display settings.

p.160

Instant Review

Sets the Instant Review display settings.

p.276

Expands the dynamic range and prevents
D-Range Setting *1
bright and dark areas from occurring.

p.207
p.208

Corrects distortions and chromaticLens Correction *1 aberrations of magnification occurring due tolens properties.

p.211

Color Space

Sets the color space to use.

p.205

Sets the file format of images saved in RAW
RAW File Format
format.

p.196

Green Button

Assigns the function to be called up when the| button is pressed.

p.197

AF/AE-L Button

Assigns the function to be called up when the=/L button is pressed.

p.120
p.123

MemoryDetermines which settings to save when the
power is turned off.

p.288

Shake
Reduction *1

Activates the Shake Reduction function.

p.142

Input Focal
LengthSets the focal length when using a lens forwhich focal length information cannot be
obtained.

p.143

A4

*1 Can be set using the control panel.

89

Custom Setting Menu Setting Items
Set the [A Custom Setting 1-4] menus to fully use the functions of a SLR
camera.
Menu

A1

Item

Page

Sets the adjustment steps for exposure.

p.118

2. Sensitivity Steps

Sets the adjustment steps for ISO
sensitivity.

p.99

3. Expanded
Sensitivity

Expands the lower and upper sensitivity
limits.

p.99

4. Meter Operating
Time

Sets the exposure metering time.

p.116

5. AE-L with AF
LockedSets whether to lock the exposure value
when the focus is locked.

p.133

6. Link AE to AF
Point

Sets whether to link the exposure and AF
point in the focusing area during multisegment metering.

p.115

7. Auto Bracketing
Order

Sets the order for Exposure Bracketingshooting.

p.118

8. Superimpose AF Sets whether to display the selected AF
Areapoint in the viewfinder.

p.130

9. AF.S Setting

Sets the action priority for when = modeis set to l and the shutter releasebutton is fully pressed.

p.125

10. AF.C Setting

Sets the action priority for Continuous
Shooting when = mode is set to k.

p.126

11. AF Assist Light

Sets whether to use the AF assist lightwhen autofocusing in dark locations.

p.127

12. WB When
Using Flash

Sets the white balance setting when using
flash.

p.201

13. AWB in
Tungsten Light

Sets whether to adjust the tungsten lightcolor tone when the white balance is set to
F (Auto White Balance).

–

14. AF with Remote Sets whether to use autofocus whenControlshooting with remote control.

p.148

4
Shooting Functions

A2

Function

1. EV Steps

90
Menu

A3

Item

Page
p.114

16. Release While
Charging

Sets whether to release shutter while thebuilt-in flash is charging.

p.81

17. Flash in
Wireless Mode

Sets the built-in flash discharge method in
the wireless mode.

p.184

18. Saving Rotation Sets whether to save rotation information
Info
when shooting.

p.235

19. Save Menu
Location

Sets whether to save the last menu tab
displayed on the monitor and to display it
again next time the 3 button ispressed.

p.275

20. Catch-in Focus

When set to [On], if [AF Mode] is set tof or l and a manual focus lens is
attached, catch-in focus shooting isenabled and the shutter is released
automatically when the subject comes into
focus.

p.136

21. AF Fine
Adjustment

Adjusts the AF focusing position.

p.128

22. Using Aperture
Ring

Sets whether to enable shutter release
when the lens aperture ring is set to theposition other than s.

p.314

Reset Custom
Functions

Resets all the settings in the [A Custom
Setting 1-4] menus to the defaults.

p.311

4
Shooting Functions
A4

Function

Sets the remote control operation while
15. Remote Control
using the remote control with the shutter
in Bulb
speed set to h.

Selecting the Appropriate Capture
Mode

91

You can switch the capture modes by setting the icons on the mode dial
to the dial indicator.

4

The W features various shooting modes, enabling you to take pictureswith settings suited for your photographic vision.
In this manual, the capture modes are referred to as follows.
Capture Mode

Mode

Page

Picture modes

I (Auto Picture)/ = (Portrait)/ s (Landscape)/q (Macro)/ \ (Moving Object)/ . (Night Scene
Portrait)/ a (Flash Off) (When shooting with Live
View, d (Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be
selected in I mode.)p.92

H (Scene)modes

A (Night Scene)/ Q (Surf & Snow)/ K (Food)/
K (Sunset)/ n (Stage Lighting)/ l (Night Snap)/
Z (Night Scene HDR)/ R (Kids)/ Y (Pet)/U (Candlelight)/ E (Museum)p.93

Exposure modese (Program)/ K (Sensitivity Priority)/ b (Shutter
Priority)/ c (Aperture Priority)/ a (Manual)p.95

Movie modeC (Movie)

p.165

Shooting Functions

Dial indicator

92

Picture Modes
Set the mode dial to =, s, q, \, . or a if you cannot capture thedesired image in I (Auto Picture) mode.
The characteristics of each mode are as follows.
Mode

4

Characteristics

Shooting Functions

I Auto Picture

The optimal capture mode is automatically selectedfrom the U (Standard), = (Portrait), s (Landscape),q (Macro), \ (Moving Object) and . (Night Scene
Portrait) modes. When shooting with Live View, d(Blue Sky) and K (Sunset) can also be selected.

=

Portrait

Optimal for capturing portraits. Reproduces a healthy
and bright skin tone.

sLandscapeDeepens the focus range, emphasizes contour andsaturation of trees and the sky, and produces avibrant image.

q

Macro

Lets you take vibrant pictures of flowers and othersmall subjects at short distances.

\

Moving Object

Lets you take sharp pictures of a quickly moving
subject, such as at sporting events. The drive modeis fixed to g (Continuous Shooting (Hi)).

.

Night Scene
Portrait

Lets you capture people against a night view or at dusk.

aFlash OffThe flash is deactivated. Other settings are the sameas U (Standard) in I.

In ., even though the flash is used, the camera will use slow shutter speeds
so the background areas beyond the flash’s reach will also appear correctly
exposed in the picture (1 Slow-speed Sync (p.174)). To prevent camera
shake, either use the Shake Reduction function or mount the camera on a
tripod.
When \ is automatically selected in I, pictures are taken in the drivemode set beforehand.

93

H Modes
By setting the mode dial to H (Scene), you can choose from thefollowing 11 shooting scenes.
Mode

Characteristics

A Night Scene

Used for night scenes. Use a tripod, etc. to prevent
shaking.

Q

Surf & Snow

For capturing images of dazzling backgrounds, suchas snowy mountains.

K

Food

For capturing images of food. Saturation will be rather
high to make it look appetizing.
For capturing sunrise or sunset in beautiful colors.

n Stage Lighting

For capturing moving subjects in poorly lit place.

lNight Snap

Z Night Scene HDR

For taking snapshots in poorly lit place.
Captures 3 images to generate a single HDR image.
Exposure is optimized for dim lighting

R

Kids

For capturing moving kids. Reproduces healthy andbright skin tone. The drive mode is fixed to g(Continuous Shooting (Hi)).

YPet

For capturing moving pets. The drive mode is fixed tog (Continuous Shooting (Hi)).

U

Candlelight

For capturing scenes in candlelight.

E Museum

For capturing images in places where a flash isprohibited.

The flash is deactivated in A, K, n, Z, U and E. To prevent camera
shake, either use the Shake Reduction function or mount the camera on a
tripod.

4
Shooting Functions

K Sunset

94
Selecting a Shooting Scene

1

Set the mode dial to H.
The scene mode status screen appears.

2

Press the M button.
The icon for the currently selectedshooting scene appears in the control
panel.

AF.A

1/ 15
ISO

1600

AUTO

AWB
-3 2 14

F 4.0[ 123]

JPEG 12M

Shooting Functions

3

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [Scene Mode]and press the 4 button.
The scene mode selection screen
appears.

ISO

1 2 +3

Scene ModeNight Scene
OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M[

4

Use the four-way controller(2345) or e-dial to choose ascene mode.

SCN

37]

Night Scene

Used for night scenes.
Use a tripod, etc. toprevent shaking
OK OK
MENU Cancel

5

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel and is ready to take a picture.

95
When the 3 button is pressed while
the mode dial is set to H (Scene), the [HScene] menu appears. Press the four-way
controller (3) to display the scene mode
selection screen and you can select a scene
in the same way as described in Step 4.

Night Scene
Used for night scenes.
Use a tripod, etc. toprevent shaking
MENU Exit

Exposure Modes
Use the exposure modes to change the sensitivity, shutter speed andaperture and take pictures according to your own photographic vision.
Characteristics
Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper exposure according to
Program line when taking pictures.

eProgramK

Sensitivity
Priority

Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture
value to obtain a proper exposure according to theset sensitivity.

b Shutter Priority

Lets you set the desired shutter speed to freeze oremphasize subject movement. Take pictures offast moving subjects that look still or subjects thatgive a sense of movement.

cAperture
Priority

Lets you set the desired aperture value forcontrolling the depth of field. Use it to obtain ablurred or sharp background.

a

ManualLets you set the shutter speed and aperture value
to capture the picture with creative intent.

Page

p.103

Shooting Functions

Mode

4

96

Setting the Exposure

Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed
Correct exposure of the subject is determined by a combination of shutter
speed and aperture setting. There are many correct combinations of
shutter speed and aperture value for a particular subject. Different
combinations produce different effects.

Effect of Shutter Speed
4
Shooting Functions

By changing the shutter speed, you can manipulate how time is expressedin the pictures you create. Unlike with your own naked eyes, in a picture
you can capture a fraction of a moment or a whole period of time, creating
different effects.
Use the b (Shutter Priority) mode.
Using slower shutter speed
If the subject is moving, the image will be
blurred because the shutter is open longer.
It is possible to enhance the effect of
motion (rivers, waterfalls, waves, etc.) byintentionally using a slower shutter speed.
Using faster shutter speed
Choosing a faster shutter speed will allow
freezing the action of a moving subject.
A faster shutter speed also helps toprevent camera shake.

Effect of Aperture
By changing the aperture, you can control the depth of the area thatappears in focus in the picture (the depth of field). By either narrowing the
focus to emphasize a single point or giving depth to your picture instead
you can completely change the feel of the picture you create.
Use the c (Aperture Priority) mode.

97

Opening the aperture (reduce the aperture value)
Objects closer and farther than the focused
subject will be more out of focus. For
instance, if you take a picture of a flower
against a landscape with the aperture open,
the landscape in front and behind the flower
will be blurred, emphasizing only the flower.
Closing the aperture (increase the aperture value)
The range in focus expands forward andbackward. For instance, if you take a pictureof a flower against a landscape with theaperture narrowed, the landscape in front
and behind the flower will be in focus.

4

The following table summarizes how the aperture affects the depth offield.
The depth of field may also change depending on the lens used andthe distance to the subject.
Open(Smaller value)

Close(Larger value)

Depth of field

Shallow

Deep

Area of focus

Narrow

Wide

Longer(Telephoto)

Shorter(Wide-angle)

Near

Far

Aperture

Lens focal length
Distance to the subject• The depth of field for the W differs depending on the lens but
compared to a 35 mm camera, the value is roughly one aperture
setting lower (the focused range becomes narrower).
• The wider the wide-angle lens, and the farther away the subject,
the deeper the depth of field is (some zoom lenses do not have ascale for depth of field because of their designs).

Shooting Functions

Aperture and Depth of Field

98

Setting the Sensitivity
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the surroundings.
The sensitivity can be set to [AUTO] or within a sensitivity range equivalent
to ISO 200 to 12800. The default setting is [AUTO].

1

Press the four-way controller (5) in Capture mode.
The [Sensitivity] screen appears.

2
4

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [AUTO Setting] or [Fixed
Value].

Sensitivity
AUTO Setting
ISO
AUTO

200

Shooting Functions

ISO

1600
200

MENU Cancel

3

Use the four-way controller (45) to change the ISO
sensitivity.
For [AUTO Setting], change the maximum sensitivity.

4

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

OK OK

99
• When the capture mode is set to n (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap) or Z
(Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode, or when the mode dial is set to C
(Movie), the sensitivity is fixed to AUTO and cannot be changed.
• When the capture mode is set to K (Sensitivity Priority) or a (Manual),[AUTO Setting] is not displayed.
• The sensitivity range can be expanded to a range of ISO 100 to 25600 when
[3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89) is set to[On]. However, the minimum sensitivity is ISO 200 when [Highlight
Correction] (p.207) is set to [On].
• Captured images may show more noise if a higher sensitivity is set. You canreduce image noise by setting [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu.
(p.100)• You can select whether to set the sensitivity in increments of 1 EV or inaccordance with the EV step setting for exposure (p.118). This can be set in[2. Sensitivity Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89).

4
Dynamic range is the ratio that indicates the light level expressed by
the CMOS sensor pixels from bright areas to dark areas. The larger
it is, the better the whole range from dark to bright areas will appear
in the picture.
By expanding the dynamic range, you can expand the light level
expressed by the CMOS sensor pixels, making it more difficult forbright area to occur in the image.
To expand the dynamic range, make the settings in [D-Range
Setting] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. (p.207)

Shooting Functions

Expanding the Dynamic Range

100

Reducing the Image Noise (Noise Reduction)
When shooting with a digital camera, image noise (image roughness or
unevenness) becomes noticeable in the following situations.
- when shooting with a long exposure- when shooting with a high sensitivity setting- when the temperature of the CMOS sensor is highYou can reduce image noise by using Noise Reduction. However, images
shot with Noise Reduction will take longer to save.

High-ISO NR
4

Reduces noise at high sensitivity (ISO) settings.

Shooting Functions

1

Select [High-ISO NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [High-ISO NR] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select [Auto], [Off],[Low], [Medium], [High] or[Custom].

High-ISO NR
ISO

Auto
Off
Low
ISO
Medium
NR
ISO
High
NR
ISO
CUSTOM Custom
NR
NR AUTOISONR OFFISONR

MENU Cancel

Auto

3

OK OK

Applies Noise Reduction at optimally calculated
levels throughout ISO range. (default setting)

Off

Does not apply Noise Reduction at any ISO setting.

Low/Medium/High

Applies Noise Reduction at constant chosen level
throughout ISO range.

CustomApplies Noise Reduction at user-defined levels foreach ISO setting.

Press the 4 button.
If you select [Auto], [Off], [Low], [Medium] or [High], proceed to Step 7.

4

101
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Setting] andpress the four-way controller (5).
The screen to set the noise reduction level according to the sensitivity
appears.

5

Use the four-way controller (23)to select a sensitivity value anduse the four-way controller (45)to set the level of noise reduction
which is applied to the selected
sensitivity.

High-ISO NR
ISO 100
ISO 200
ISO 400
ISO 800
ISO 1600
ISO 3200
ISO 6400
MENU

1 2
ISO

NR OFFISONR OFFISONR OFF
ISO

NR
ISO

NR
ISO

NR
ISO

NR

6

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed in Step 2 appears again.

7

Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

4
Shooting Functions

Reset
Turn the e-dial to display the [High-ISO
NR 2] screen.
Press the | button to reset the settings.
The sensitivity values displayed vary according to the [1. EV Steps] and[2. Sensitivity Steps] settings made in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu
(p.89).

102
Slow Shutter Speed NR
Reduces noise during long exposures.

1
2

Select [Slow Shutter Speed NR] in the [A Rec. Mode 2]
menu and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [AUTO], [ON] or [OFF],and press the 4 button.

4
Shooting Functions3

1 2 3 4

Cross Processing
Digital Filter
HDR Capture
Multi-exposure
Interval Shooting
High-ISO NR
Slow Shutter Speed NR
MENU Cancel

OFF
OFF
HDR
OFF

NR AUTOISOONNR AUTONR OFF

OK

OK

AUTO

Determines conditions such as shutter speed, sensitivity, andinternal temperature, and automatically applies Noise Reduction
as necessary. (default setting)ON

Applies Noise Reduction when the exposure time is longer than
1 second.

OFF

Does not apply Noise Reduction.

Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• Processing may take a while when shooting with Slow Shutter Speed NR set
to [ON]. Pictures cannot be taken while an image is being processed.
• When the Noise Reduction function is activated, [nr] blinks on the status
screen and in the viewfinder where the aperture value is normally displayed,
and a countdown of processing time is displayed where the shutter speed isnormally displayed.

103

Changing the Exposure Mode
This camera features the following five exposure modes. Use the mode
dial to change the exposure mode. (p.91)
The settings available for each exposure mode are as follows.
(z: Available#: Restricted

×: Not available)
Change Change Change
Shutter Aperture Sensi- Page
Speed
Value
tivityExposure
Mode

Description

EV CompensationeProgram

Automatically sets
the shutter speed
and aperture value
to obtain a proper
exposureaccording to
Program line when
taking pictures.

z

# *1

# *1

z

p.104

Automatically sets
the shutter speed
K
and aperture value
Sensitivity to obtain a proper
exposure
Priority
according to theset sensitivity.

z

×

×

Other
than
AUTO

p.106

b
ShutterPriority

Lets you set thedesired shutter
speed forexpressing moving
subjects.

z

z

×

z

p.107

c
Aperture
Priority

Lets you set theaperture value forcontrolling thedepth of field.

z

×

z

z

p.108

a
ManualLets you set the
shutter speed andaperture value tocapture the picturewith creative
intent.

×

z

z

Other
than
AUTO

p.110

4
Shooting Functions*1 In [Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can make the setting so that the
shutter speed and/or aperture value can be changed by turning the e-dial. (p.105)

104
Using a Lens with an Aperture Ring
When using a lens with an aperturering, set the aperture to the s (AUTO)
position while holding down the autolock button on the lens.

4

A 22 16 11 8 5.6

Using the e (Program) Mode

Shooting Functions

Automatically sets the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain a proper
exposure according to Program line when taking pictures.
You can also use the e-dial to change the shutter speed and aperture
value while maintaining the proper exposure. (p.105)

1

2

Set the mode dial to e.

Turn the e-dial while pressing
the mc button to adjust the
exposure.

The EV compensation value isdisplayed in the status screen andviewfinder.

105
P

AF.A

1/ 125
ISO

AUTO

F 5.6

200
AWB
-3 2 1ISO

1 2 +3

JPEG 12M[

37]

EV compensation value

E-dial in Program
You can set the function of the e-dial whenturned in e mode. Set in [Green Button] of
the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu. (Thisoperation is available only when [Green
Button] is assigned to the | button.)(p.197)
If the | button is pressed after turning thee-dial, the camera returns to normal emode.
P SHIFT

Green Button
Green Button
Action in M Mode
E-dial in Program

P SHIFT
Tv
Av
OFF

Shifts combination of theaperture and shutter speed
to obtain proper exposure
OK OK
MENU Cancel

Automatically adjusts the shutter speed and aperture value toobtain a proper exposure (Program shift). (default setting)bcSets the shutter speed.
Sets the aperture value.

OFF

Disables the e-dial operation when turned in e mode.

4
Shooting Functions• EV compensation value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
and aperture value when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (p.98).

106
Using the K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode
You can set the sensitivity to suit the brightness of the subject.
The shutter speed and aperture value are automatically set according to
the selected sensitivity to obtain a proper exposure.

1

Set the mode dial to K.

4
Shooting Functions

2

Turn the e-dial to adjust thesensitivity.

The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder.

Sv

AF.A

1/ 30
ISO

F 4.5

200
AWB
-3 2 1

JPEG 12M

ISO

1 2 +3[37]• You can set the sensitivity to a value equivalent to ISO 200 to 12800. [AUTO]
is not available.
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mc button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.117)• The sensitivity can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the exposure
steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)

107
Using the b (Shutter Priority) Mode
Lets you set the desired shutter speed for expressing moving subjects.
When taking pictures of a fast moving subject, you can increase the
shutter speed to make the subject look still or decrease the shutter speed
to have the subject show movement.
The aperture value is automatically set to give a proper exposure
depending on the shutter speed.
1Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)

1

Set the mode dial to b.
4
Shooting Functions

2

Turn the e-dial to adjust the
shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within therange of 1/6000 to 30 seconds.

The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder.

Tv

AF.A

1/ 125
ISO

AUTO

F 5.6

400
AWB
-3 2 1

JPEG 12M

ISO

1 2 +3

[

37]

108
• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mc button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.117)• The shutter speed can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected shutter speed
when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (p.98).

Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the aperture value will blink in the status
screen and viewfinder. If the subject is
too bright, choose a faster shutter
speed. If it is too dark, choose a slower shutter speed. When theaperture value indication stops blinking, you can take a picture withproper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.

4
Shooting Functions

Using the c (Aperture Priority) Mode
Set the aperture value for controlling the depth of field. The depth of field
is deeper and the front and back of the focused object is clear when theaperture is set to a large value, a small lens opening. The depth of field isshallower and the front and back of the focused object is blurred when theaperture is set to a small value, large lens opening.
The shutter speed is automatically set to the proper exposure dependingon the aperture value.
1Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)

1

Set the mode dial to c.

2

109Turn the e-dial to adjust theaperture value.

The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder.

Av

AF.A

1/ 30
ISO

AUTO

F 4.5

400
AWB
-3 2 1

4[

37]• Turn the e-dial while pressing the mc button to change the EV
compensation value. (p.117)• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)• The proper exposure may not be obtained with the selected aperture value
when the sensitivity is set to [Fixed Value] (p.98).

Exposure Warning
If the subject is too bright or too dark,
the shutter speed will blink in the status
screen and viewfinder. When thesubject is too bright, set the aperture to a smaller lens opening (larger
number), and when too dark, set the aperture to a larger lens opening(smaller number). Once blinking stops, you can take a picture withproper exposure.
Use a commercially available ND (Neutral Density) Filter if the subject
is too bright. Use a flash if it is too dark.

Shooting Functions

JPEG 12M

ISO

1 2 +3

110
Using the a (Manual) Mode
You can set the shutter speed and aperture value. This mode is suitableto take pictures of your choice by combining them. This mode isconvenient for taking pictures using the same combination of the shutter
speed and aperture settings or taking intentionally underexposed (darker)
or overexposed (brighter) photographs.
1 Effect of Aperture and Shutter Speed (p.96)

1

Set the mode dial to a.

4
Shooting Functions

2

Turn the e-dial to adjust the
shutter speed.
The shutter speed can be set within therange of 1/6000 to 30 seconds.

3

Turn the e-dial while pressing the
mc button to adjust theaperture value.

The set values are displayed in the status
screen and viewfinder.
On the status screen, the e-dial indicatorappears next to the shutter speed or
aperture value, depending on which is
being adjusted.

111
M

AF.A

1/ 125ISOAWB-3 2 1

JPEG 12M

ISO

1 2 +3[37]

Difference from theproper exposure• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the mode dial is set to a, thesensitivity is set to the last set value.
• The shutter speed and aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or
1/2 EV. Set the exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1]
menu. (p.118)• The aperture value can also be changed by pressing the mc button once,
taking your finger off the button and turning the e-dial. In this case, theaperture value is set when the mc button is pressed again or the exposure
metering timer (p.116) elapses.

4
Shooting Functions

Of the shutter speed and aperture value,
the value being adjusted is underlined in
the viewfinder.
While adjusting the shutter speed or
aperture value, the difference from theproper exposure (EV value) appears in
the viewfinder. The proper exposure is
set when [0.0] is displayed.
The EV compensation value blinks in the
viewfinder when the difference from theproper exposure becomes ±3.0 or larger.

F 5.6

200

112
Using AE Lock
When [AF/AE-L Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu is set to [AELock] and the exposure is locked (p.120) by pressing the =/L
button in a mode, if the shutter speed or exposure value is changed,
the combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes while theexposure value is retained.
Example) If the shutter speed is 1/125 sec. and aperture is F5.6 andthese settings are locked with the =/L button, theaperture automatically changes to F11 if the shutter speed
is changed to 1/30 sec. with the e-dial.

4

Action in a Mode

Shooting Functions

You can set the function of the | button
when the camera is set to a mode. Set
in [Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode4] menu. (This operation is available
only when [Green Button] is assigned to
the | button. (p.197))

Green Button
Green Button
Action in M Mode
E-dial in Program

P LINE
TvSHIFTAvSHIFT
OFF

Sets the aperture andshutter speed to theProgram Line exposure
OK OK
MENU Cancel

P LINE

Adjusts the aperture value and shutter speed to obtain a proper
exposure according to the Program Line. (default setting)

Tv SHIFT

Adjusts the shutter speed while the aperture value remains
fixed to obtain a proper exposure.

Av SHIFT

Adjusts the aperture value while the shutter speed remains
fixed to obtain a proper exposure.

OFF

Disables the | button operation when pressed in a mode.

113
Using the Bulb ShootingThis setting is useful when shooting night scenes and fireworks which
require the long exposures.

1

4

Turn the e-dial to the left (f) andset the shutter speed to h.

Mh appears after the slowest shutter
speed (30 sec.).

ISO

AF.A

Bulb

AWB
-3 2 1

JPEG 12M

3

F 5.6

200
ISO

1 2 +3[37]

Press the shutter release button.
The shutter remains open as long as the shutter release button is keptpressed.
In Bulb shooting, the following functions are not available.
- EV Compensation- Exposure Bracketing- Continuous Shooting- Interval Shooting- HDR Capture

Shooting Functions

2

Set the mode dial to a.

114

4
Shooting Functions• Turn the e-dial while holding down the mc button to adjust the aperture
value.
• The aperture value can be set in increments of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV. Set the
exposure steps in [1. EV Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.118)• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off during Bulb
shooting.
• Use a sturdy tripod to prevent camera shake during Bulb shooting.
• To operate the shutter release button on the remote control, set in [15.
Remote Control in Bulb] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.90).
• You can reduce image noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused by
the slow shutter speed. Set in [Slow Shutter Speed NR] of the [A Rec.
Mode 2] menu. (p.102)• When the sensitivity is set to [AUTO] and the shutter speed is set to h,
the sensitivity is set to the last set value.
• The upper sensitivity limit for Bulb shooting is ISO 1600.
• There is no limit on exposure time for Bulb shooting. However, werecommend using the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when shooting witha long exposure setting as the battery is being drained while the shutter
remains open. (p.50)

Selecting the Metering Method
Choose the part of the viewfinder to use for measuring brightness anddetermining exposure. The following three methods are available.
L Multi-segment Metering (default setting)
The scene in the viewfinder is metered in
16 different zones. Even in backlit
locations, this mode automaticallydetermines what level of brightness is inwhich portion and automatically adjusts
exposure.
Multi-segment metering method is not available when using a lens other thana DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens, or when the lens aperture ring is set
to the position other than s.

115
Linking AE to AF Point during Multi-segment
Metering
In [6. Link AE to AF Point] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89),
you can link the exposure and AF point in the focusing area duringmulti-segment metering.
1

Off

Exposure is set separately from the AF point. (default setting)2

On

Exposure is set in accordance with the AF point.

N Spot Metering
The brightness is measured only within alimited area at the center of the viewfinder.
You can use this in combination with the AE
Lock (p.120) when the subject is extremely
small and the correct exposure is difficult toobtain.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

4
Shooting Functions

M Center-weighted Metering
Metering is weighted at the center of the
viewfinder. Use this metering when you wantto compensate the exposure by experience,
instead of leaving it to the camera. The
illustration shows that sensitivity increases
as the pattern height increases (center).
This mode does not automaticallycompensate for backlit scenes.

116

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [AE Metering]and press the 4 button.
The [AE Metering] screen appears.

AE Metering
Multi-segment
OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M[

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select a metering method.

37]

AE Metering
Multi-segment

4
Shooting Functions

MENU Cancel

4

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu.

Setting the Meter Operating TimeYou can set the exposure metering time to [10 sec.] (default setting),[3 sec.] or [30 sec.] in [4. Meter Operating Time] of the [A Custom
Setting 1] menu (p.89).

117

Adjusting the ExposureThis allows you to deliberately overexpose (brighten) or underexpose(darken) your picture.
The exposure steps can be selected from 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV Steps]of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
You can adjust the EV compensation value from –3 to +3 (EV).

1Turn the e-dial while pressing the
mc button.

mc button

The exposure is adjusted.

4

Av

AF.A

1/ 30
ISO

AUTO

F 4.5

400
AWB
-3 2 1ISO

1 2 +3

JPEG 12M[

37]

Compensation value• EV compensation is not available when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).
• The EV compensation is not canceled by turning the camera off or byswitching to another capture mode.
• If [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.197), the compensation value is reset to 0.0 when the |button is pressed.
• EV compensation can also be changed by pressing the mc button once,
taking your finger off the button and turning the e-dial. In this case, EV
compensation is set when the mc button is pressed again or the exposure
metering timer (p.116) elapses.

Shooting Functions

m is displayed in the status screen andviewfinder during adjustment.

118
Changing the Exposure Steps
Set the exposure compensation steps toincrements of 1/3 EV or 1/2 EV in [1. EV
Steps] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu
(p.89).

1. EV Steps
1 1/3 EV Steps
2 1/2 EV Steps

Exposure compensation steps
now set to 1/3 EV
MENU Cancel

Step Interval

4

OK OK

Exposure Setting Value

1/3 EV±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0

1/2 EV

±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0

Shooting Functions

Changing the Exposure Automatically when Shooting(Exposure Bracketing)
You can take three consecutive images at three different exposure levels
when the shutter release button is pressed. The first image is exposed withno compensation, the second image is underexposed (negativecompensation) and the third image is overexposed (positivecompensation).

Standard exposure

Underexposure

Overexposure

You can set [7. Auto Bracketing Order] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu
(p.89).
10-+Standard ´ Underexposed ´ Overexposed (default setting)2-0+

Underexposed ´ Standard ´ Overexposed

3+0-Overexposed ´ Standard ´ Underexposed

40+-Standard ´ Overexposed ´ Underexposed

119• Exposure Bracketing is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to \ (Moving Object), or R (Kids)/Y (Pet)/Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode
- when the shutter speed is set to h
• Exposure Bracketing and Multi-exposure cannot be used at the same time.
The function selected last is used.

1

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller(45) to select l.

Drive Mode
Exposure Bracketing

4
1 2 3

±0.5EVMENU Cancel

3

OK OK

Turn the e-dial to set the bracket value.
The value for the first image blinks on the monitor.
The following bracket values can be set according to the step interval set
in [1. EV Steps] (p.118) of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu.
Step Interval

Bracket Value

1/3 EV±0.3, ±0.7, ±1.0, ±1.3, ±1.7, ±2.0, ±2.3, ±2.7, ±3.0

1/2 EV

±0.5, ±1.0, ±1.5, ±2.0, ±2.5, ±3.0

Available operations
mc button + e-dial Adjusts the EV compensation only when taking
underexposed or overexposed image with Exposure
Bracketing. Images are taken with an EV
compensation value set to 0 (intermediate value).
| button

4

Resets the compensation value to ±0. (Available only
when [Green Button] is assigned to the | button in[Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
(p.197).)

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

Shooting Functions

3 2 1

120

5

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder, and EV compensation
value appears in the status screen and viewfinder when focused.

6

Press the shutter release button fully.
Continue to press the shutter release button until three images arecaptured.
Three consecutive images will be taken according to the order set in[7. Auto Bracketing Order] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89).
• When [AF Mode] is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked in
the first image and is used for subsequent images.
• When you take your finger off the shutter release button during Exposure
Bracketing, the exposure setting will remain effective for twice the amount of
the exposure metering timer (default setting is approx. 20 seconds) (p.116)
and you can take a picture at the next compensation value. In this case,autofocus works for each image. After about twice the amount of the
exposure metering timer elapses, the camera returns to settings for taking
the first image.
• You can combine Exposure Bracketing with the built-in flash or an external
flash (P-TTL auto only) to change only the flash output continuously.
However, when using an external flash, holding the shutter release button
down to take three consecutive images may cause the second and third
images to be taken before the flash is fully charged. Take each image after
confirming that charging is complete.

4
Shooting Functions

Locking the Exposure Before Shooting(AE Lock)
AE Lock is a function that locks the exposure prior to taking a picture. Use
this when the subject is too small or is backlit and a proper exposure
setting cannot be obtained.

1

Select [AF/AE-L Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [AF/AE-L Button] screen appears.

2

121
Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select [AE Lock].

AF/AE-L Button
AF1 Enable AF1
AF2 Enable AF2
AF Cancel AF
AE-L AE Lock
Locks the exposure value
when the AF/AE-L button
is pressed
OK OK
MENU Cancel

3
4

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

Set the exposure and press the=/L button.
The camera locks the exposure(brightness) at that instant.
@ is displayed in the status screen andviewfinder while the AE Lock is
engaged.
• The exposure remains locked as long as the =/L button is keptpressed or the shutter release button is kept pressed halfway. The exposure
remains locked for twice the amount of the exposure metering timer (p.116)
even after taking your finger off the =/L button.
• You will hear a beep when the =/L button is pressed. The beep canbe turned off. (p.269)• AE Lock is not available when the shutter speed is set to h.
• When any of the following operations are performed, AE Lock is canceled.
- the =/L button is pressed again- the Q button, 3 button or M button is pressed- the mode dial is turned- the lens is changed- the lens with an s (Auto) position is set to other than the s position• The combination of shutter speed and aperture value changes depending on
the zooming position even while the AE Lock is engaged when using a zoom
lens for which the maximum aperture varies depending on the focal length.
However, the exposure value does not change and a picture is taken at abrightness level set when the AE Lock is activated.
• The exposure can also be locked when the focus is locked. Set in [5. AE-Lwith AF Locked] of the [A Custom Setting 1] menu. (p.133)

Shooting Functions

5

4

Focusing122

You can focus with the following methods.
= Autofocus

The camera automatically focuses on the subject
when the shutter release button is pressed halfway.

\ Manual focus

Manually adjust the focus.

Using the Autofocus
4
Shooting Functions

You can also choose the autofocus mode from l (Single mode) where
the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on the subject andthe focus is locked at that position, k (Continuous mode) where thesubject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the shutter releasebutton is pressed halfway, and f (Auto) which automatically switches
between l and k. The default setting is f.
1 Setting the AF Mode (p.125)

1

Set the focus mode lever to =.

2

123
Look through the viewfinder andpress the shutter release button
halfway.

The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is
not in focus.)
1 Subjects that are difficult to focus on(p.73)

4

Using the =/L Button to Focus on the Subject
You can set the camera so that focusing is performed when the =/L
button is pressed. Use this setting when the autofocus by pressing the
shutter release button halfway is not desired.

1

Select [AF/AE-L Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [AF/AE-L Button] screen appears.

Shooting Functions

Focus Indicator

124

2

Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select [Enable AF1] or[Enable AF2].

AF/AE-L Button
AF1 Enable AF1
AF2 Enable AF2
AF Cancel AF
AE-L AE Lock
AF is performed when the
AF/AE-L button is pressed
MENU Cancel

Enable AF1

Autofocus is performed by using the =/L button or
the shutter release button. (default setting)

Enable AF2

Autofocus is performed only when the =/L button ispressed and not when the shutter release button is pressedhalfway.

Cancel AF\ appears in the viewfinder while the =/L button ispressed. Autofocus is not performed when the shutter
release button is pressed. (Take your finger off the =/L button to return to normal autofocus mode.)

AE Lock

The exposure setting is locked when the =/L button
is pressed. (p.120)

4
Shooting Functions

3
4

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

5

OK OK

Press the =/L button whilelooking through the viewfinder.
Autofocus is performed.

125

Setting the AF Mode
You can choose from the following three autofocus modes.
Switches automatically between l and k modes
according to the subject. (default setting)fAuto• [AF Mode] is fixed to f in I (Auto Picture) mode.
• Even if f is selected, [AF Mode] is fixed to l when taking
pictures by using Live View with the mode dial set to e, K, b,
c or a.

When the shutter release button is pressed halfway to focus on
the subject, the focus is locked at that position (Focus Lock). To
focus on another subject, take your finger off the shutter releasebutton first, then press the shutter release button halfway again.

1

Focus-priority

The shutter cannot be released until thesubject is in focus. (default setting)If the subject is too close to the camera,
move back and take the picture. If thesubject is difficult to focus (p.73), adjust
the focus manually. (p.134)

2

Release-priority

The shutter can be released even if thesubject is not in focus.

4
Shooting FunctionslSingle mode

• [AF Mode] is fixed to l in = (Portrait), s (Landscape), q(Macro), . (Night Scene Portrait) and a (Flash Off) of Picturemode or A (Night Scene), Q (Surf & Snow), K (Food), K(Sunset), Z (Night Scene HDR), U (Candlelight), and E(Museum) of H (Scene) mode.
• The AF assist light turns on as necessary. (p.127)• Set the action priority for when the shutter release button ispressed fully in [9. AF.S Setting] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu
(p.89).

126
The subject is kept in focus by continuous adjustment while the
shutter release button is pressed halfway. The focus indicator ]appears in the viewfinder and you will hear a beep. Even if thesubject is not in focus, the shutter can be released when the
shutter release button is pressed fully.

kContinuousmode

4
Shooting Functions

1
2• Available only when the mode dial is set to e, K, b, c or a.
• [AF Mode] is fixed to k in \ (Moving Object) of Picture modeand n (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap), R (Kids), and Y (Pet)of H (Scene) mode.
• When the shutter release button is pressed halfway or the=/L button is used to adjust the focus, the camera
automatically tracks the subject if it is determined to be a moving
object.
• Set the action priority for Continuous Shooting in [10. AF.C
Setting] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.89).

1

Focus-priority

Takes pictures giving priority to keeping
the subject in focus during Continuous
Shooting. (default setting)2

FPS-priority

Takes pictures giving priority to theshooting speed during Continuous
Shooting.

Set the focus mode lever to =.
Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

3

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [AF Mode]and press the 4 button.
The [AF Mode] screen appears.

AF Mode
AF.A
OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M

[

37]

127

4

Use the four-way controller (45)to select an AF mode.

AF ModeAF.A

MENU Cancel

5

AF.S

AF.C

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.

You can set whether or not to use the AF assist light during lmode in [11. AF Assist Light] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu (p.89).
1On

To make focusing easier when the subject is in a dark location,
the AF assist light turns on when the shutter release button ispressed halfway. (default setting)

2

Off

The AF assist light will not be used.

4
Shooting Functions• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
• [AF Mode] cannot be changed when the capture mode is set to Picture modeor H (Scene) mode.
• Always set the camera to l when using the Quick-Shift Focus System on
a DA lens.

128

AF Fine Adjustment
You can adjust the AF focusing position.
• Be sure to use [AF Fine Adjustment] only when necessary. Care should
be taken as adjusting the autofocus may make it difficult to capture
images with the appropriate focus.
• Any camera shake during test shooting may make it difficult to obtain theaccurate focusing position. Therefore, always use a tripod when taking test
shots.

1
4
Shooting Functions

2

Select [21. AF Fine Adjustment] in the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [On] and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [21. AF Fine Adjustment] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to adjust the value.

21. AF Fine Adjustment+3

MENU Cancel

±0

OK OK

Available operations

4

Four-way controller (5)Adjusts the focus to a closer position.

Four-way controller (4)| button

Adjusts the focus to a farther position.
Resets the adjustment value to ±0.

Press the 4 button.
The adjustment value is saved.

5

Press the 3 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

129

6

Take a test picture.
You can easily check the focusing point by enlarging the image during
Digital Preview (p.140) or Live View (p.159).
Select [Off] in Step 2 to negate an effect of the adjustment value (however, thisdoes not reset the value).

Selecting the Focusing Area (AF Point)
Choose the part of the viewfinder to set focus to.
Selected AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder (Superimpose AF Area).
Auto(5 AF Points)

Out of the 5 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF
point even if the subject is not centered. (default setting)cAuto
Out of the 11 AF points, the camera selects the optimum AF(11 AF Points) point even if the subject is not centered.

S Select

Sets the focusing area to the user selected point fromeleven points in the AF frame.

O Spot

Sets the focusing area to the center of the viewfinder.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [Select AF
Point] and press the 4 button.
The [Select AF Point] screen appears.

Select AF Point
Auto (5 AF Points)
OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M[

37]

4
Shooting Functions

b

130

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select a focusing area.

Select AF Point
Auto (5 AF Points)

AUTO

MENU Cancel

4

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
• AF point(s) are not illuminated red in the viewfinder when [Off] is selected for[8. Superimpose AF Area] in the [A Custom Setting 2] menu.
• The focusing area is fixed to O regardless of this setting when using lenses
other than DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lenses.

4
Shooting Functions

Setting the Focus Position in the AF Frame1

Set the focusing area to S andpress the 4 button.

Select AF Point
SelectMENU Cancel

The camera is ready to take a picture.

OK OK

2

131
Use the four-way controller(2345) to change the AF
point.

The selected AF point appears in thestatus screen.

AUTO
PICT

AF.A

1/ 20

F 5.6

ISO

AUTO

800
-3 2 14

1 2 +3AWB OK1

S[

37]

Available operations
4 button

Returns the AF point to the center of the AF
frame.

Press and hold 4 button

Disables changing the AF point and enables
direct key operation of the four-way controller(2345). To enable changing the AF point,press the 4 button while direct key
operation is enabled. You will hear a beep
when switching between enabled anddisabled.

The AF point(s) light red in the viewfinder(Superimpose AF Area) and you cancheck where you set the AF point.

The position of the changed AF point is stored even if the camera is turned off
or the focusing area is switched to b, c or O.

Shooting Functions

JPEG 12M

132

Locking the Focus (Focus Lock)If the subject is outside the range of the focusing area, the camera cannot
automatically focus on the subject. In this case, set [AF Mode] to l
(Single mode) first, focus the camera on the subject in the focusing area,lock the focus at that position (Focus Lock), and then recompose yourpicture.

1

Set [AF Mode] to l.
Refer to p.125.

4

2

Shooting Functions

Frame the desired composition
for your picture in the viewfinder.

Example) The person is out offocus and the background is
focused instead.

3

Center the subject to focus in the
viewfinder and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus. (When blinking, the subject is
not in focus.)

4

Lock the focus.
Keep the shutter release button pressed halfway. The focus will remain
locked.

133

5

Recompose the picture while
keeping the shutter releasebutton pressed halfway.

Locking Exposure when the Focus is Locked
Set [5. AE-L with AF Locked] in the[A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89) tolock the exposure value while the focus
is locked. By default, the exposure is
not locked when the focus is locked.

5. AE-L with AF Locked
1 Off
2 On

AE is locked
when the focus
is locked
MENU Cancel

OK OK

1

Off

Exposure is not locked when the focus is locked. (default setting)2

On

Exposure is locked when the focus is locked.

4
Shooting Functions• The focus is locked while the focus indicator ] is displayed.
• Turning the zoom ring with the focus locked may cause the subject to be outof focus.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.269)• You cannot set the focus lock when [AF Mode] is set to k (Continuousmode), or the capture mode is set to \ (Moving Object) of Picture mode, orn (Stage Lighting), R (Kids), Y (Pet) or l (Night Snap) of H (Scene)mode. In such cases, the autofocus continues to focus on the subject until
the shutter is released (Continuous Autofocus).

134

Adjusting the Focus Manually (Manual Focus)
When you adjust the focus manually, you can use either the focus
indicator or the matte field in the viewfinder.

Using the Focus Indicator
The focus indicator ] appears in the viewfinder when the subject is in
focus even during manual focus.
You can manually adjust the focus using the focus indicator ].
4

1

Shooting Functions

2

Set the focus mode lever to \.

Look through the viewfinder,press the shutter release button
halfway and turn the focusing
ring.
MF
AF

The focus indicator ] appears and you
will hear a beep when the subject comes
into focus.

Focus Indicator

135• Adjust the focus manually using the matte field in the viewfinder when thesubject is difficult to focus (p.73) and the focus indicator will not appear.
• The beep that sounds when the image is focused can be turned off. (p.269)

Using the Viewfinder Matte Field
You can manually adjust the focus using the matte field in viewfinder.

1

Set the focus mode lever to \.

4
Shooting Functions

2

Look through the viewfinder andturn the focusing ring until thesubject is clearly visible in the
viewfinder.
MF
AF

136
Shooting in Catch-in Focus Mode
When [20. Catch-in Focus] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.90)
is set to [On], if [AF Mode] is set to f or l and one of thefollowing types of lenses is attached, catch-in focus shooting isenabled and the shutter is released automatically when the subject
comes into focus.
• Manual focus lens
• DA or FA lens that has an = and \ setting on the lens (thesetting on the lens must be set to \ before shooting)4
Shooting Functions

How to Take Pictures
1 Attach a proper lens to the camera.
2 Set the focus mode lever to =.
3 Set [AF Mode] to f or l.
4 Set the focus on a position the subject will pass.
5 Press the shutter release button fully.
The shutter is released automatically when the subject comes
into focus at the set position.

Checking the Composition, Exposureand Focus Before Shooting (Preview)137

You can use the preview function to check depth of field, composition,
exposure and focus before taking a picture.
There are two preview methods.
Preview Method|

Optical Preview

e Digital Preview

Description
For checking the depth of field with the viewfinder.
For checking the composition, exposure and focus on
the monitor.

You can also use the Live View function to display a real-time image on themonitor and change the shooting function settings during display and check thesettings by enlarging the image. Refer to p.159 for details.

4

Assigning the Preview Function to the Green
ButtonShooting FunctionsFirst, assign the preview function to the | button.

1

Select [Green Button] in the[A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Green Button] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller(5).

1 2 3 4

Color SpaceRAW File Format
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
MemoryShake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU Exit

sRGB
PEF

AF1
35mm

Green Button
Green Button
Action in M Mode
E-dial in ProgramMENU

P LINEP SHIFT138

3

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Optical Preview]or [Digital Preview] and press the
4 button.
If you selected [Optical Preview], proceed
to Step 6.

4
4

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Histogram],[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge
Instant Review].

Green Button
Green Button
Custom Image
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
Digital Filter
Cross Processing
RAW One Push File Format
OK OK
MENU Cancel

Green Button
Digital Preview
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review

Shooting Functions

MENU

5
6

Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Press the 3 button twice.
The preview function is assigned to the | button and the camera is
ready to take a picture.
While shooting with Interval Shooting, Multi-exposure or Live View, OpticalPreview is used regardless of the setting.

139

Displaying the Optical Preview

1

2

Position the subject inside the AF
frame and press the shutter
release button halfway to focus
on the subject.

Press the | button while looking
through the viewfinder.

3

Take your finger off the | button.
Optical Preview is ended and the camera is ready to take a picture.

Shooting Functions

You can check the depth of field in the
viewfinder while the | button is pressed.
During this time, no shooting information
is displayed in the viewfinder, and the
shutter cannot be released.

4

140

Displaying the Digital Preview

1

Focus on the subject, thencompose the picture in the
viewfinder and press the |button.

The icon (|) appears on the monitor
during preview and you can check thecomposition, exposure and focus.

4
Shooting Functions

INFO

Available operations

2

E-dialEnlarges the preview image. (p.223)

M button

Saves the preview image. Select [Save as]
and press the 4 button.

Press the shutter release button halfway.
Digital Preview is ended and the autofocus system operates.
The maximum display time for Digital Preview is 60 seconds.

Using the Shake Reduction Function
to Prevent Camera Shake141

Taking Pictures Using the Shake Reduction Function
The Shake Reduction function reduces camera shake that occurs when
the shutter release button is pressed. This is useful for taking pictures insituations where camera shake is likely to occur. The Shake Reduction
function allows you to take pictures at approximately 4 steps slower
shutter speed without a risk of camera shake.
The Shake Reduction function is ideal when taking pictures in the following
situations.

Blurred picture

Picture taken with
the Shake Reduction function• The Shake Reduction function does not compensate for blurring caused by subject
movement. To take pictures of a moving subject, increase the shutter speed.
• The Shake Reduction function may not fully reduce camera shake when
taking close-up shots. In this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake
Reduction function and use the camera with a tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work when shooting with a very
slow shutter speed, for example when panning or shooting night scenes. In
this case, it is recommended to turn off the Shake Reduction function and use
the camera with a tripod.

4
Shooting Functions• When taking pictures in dimly lit locations, such as indoors, at night,
on cloudy days and in the shade• When taking telephoto pictures

142
Setting the Shake Reduction Function

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [Shake
Reduction] and press the 4
button.
The [Shake Reduction] screen appears.

Shake Reduction
On
OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M

4[

Shooting Functions

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select k or l.
k

Uses Shake Reduction. (default
setting)l

Does not use Shake Reduction.

Shake Reduction
On

MENU Cancel

4

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.

5

Press the shutter release button halfway.
k appears in the viewfinder and the
Shake Reduction function is activated.

37]

OK OK

143
• Be sure to turn the Shake Reduction function off when using the camera witha tripod.
• The Shake Reduction function automatically turns off in the following situations.
- Self-timer shooting- Remote Control shooting- when the shutter speed is set to h
- when [Auto Align] is set to P (Off) in the [HDR Capture] setting- when using the flash in the wireless mode
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned on when the capturemode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode.

When the Focal Length Cannot Be Automatically Detected
The Shake Reduction function operates by obtaining the lens informationsuch as focal length.
If the camera uses a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens, the lensinformation is automatically obtained when the Shake Reduction functionis activated.
If you use a lens whose information such as focal length cannot be
automatically obtained (p.312), the [Input Focal Length] setting screen
appears when the camera is turned on with the Shake Reduction function
set to k.
Set the focal length manually in the [Input Focal Length] setting screen.
• The [Input Focal Length] setting screen does not appear when using a lens
whose information such as focal length can be automatically obtained.
• When using a lens without the s position on the aperture or with the aperture
set to a position other than the s position, set [22. Using Aperture Ring] inthe [A Custom Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. (p.314)• The effect of Shake Reduction is influenced by the shooting distance as well
as focal length information. The Shake Reduction function may not work as
effectively as expected when shooting at close ranges.

4
Shooting Functions• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.88).
• The Shake Reduction function will not fully work (for about 2 seconds) rightafter turning on the camera or restoring from Auto Power Off. Wait for the
Shake Reduction function to become stable, and then press the shutter button
gently. If k appears in the viewfinder when you press the shutter releasebutton halfway, the camera is ready to take a picture.
• The Shake Reduction function is available with any W compatible PENTAX
lens. However, when the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position
or a lens without an s position is used, the camera will not operate unless [22.
Using Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu. Set
this beforehand. In such cases, however, some functions will be restricted. Refer
to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for details.

144

1

Use the four-way controller (45)or the e-dial to set the focal length.
Select from the following 34 focal length
values. (The default setting is 35 mm.)8

Input Focal Length

100

120

135

10 12 15 18 20 24 28 30 35

40 45 50 55 65 70 75 85 100 120

MENU Cancel

OK OK

135 150 180 200 250 300 350 400 450 500
550 600 700 800• If the focal length for your lens is not listed above, select the value closest to
the actual focal length (example: [18] for 17 mm and [100] for 105 mm).
• When using a zoom lens, select the actual focal length at the zoom setting
being used in the same manner.

4
Shooting Functions

2

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
To change the focal length setting, use [Input Focal Length] in the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.88).

145

Shooting with Self-timer
This camera has the following two types of self-timers.
Self-timerg (12 sec.)

Self-timer

Z (2 sec.)

Shutter is released after about 12 seconds. Use this mode toinclude the photographer in the picture.
A mirror pops up immediately after shutter release button ispressed (Mirror lock-up function). The shutter is released after
about 2 seconds. Use this mode to avoid camera shake when
the shutter release button is pressed.
The AE Lock function is activated and exposure is locked
immediately before the mirror pops up.

1

Mount the camera onto a tripod.

2

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.

4
Shooting Functions

The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

3
4

Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
Press the four-way controller (3)and use the four-way controller(45) to select g or Z.

Drive Mode
Self-timer (12 sec.)

2s

MENU Cancel

5

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

OK OK

146

6

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when the subject is in focus.

7

4

Press the shutter release button
fully.

Shooting Functions

For g, the self-timer lamp starts blinking
slowly and blinks rapidly 2 seconds
before the shutter is released. The beepis heard and the rate increases. The
shutter will be released about 12 seconds
after the shutter release button is pressed fully.
For Z, the shutter will be released about 2 seconds after the shutter
release button is pressed fully.
• The self-timer shooting is not available when the capture mode is set to \(Moving Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene)mode.
• Select a mode other than g or Z in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
self-timer shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off if[Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when g or Z is set.
• You can set the camera so that the beep does not sound. (p.269)• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lockfunction (p.120). The light entering viewfinder has no effect on the exposure
when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).

147

Shooting with Remote Control (Optional)
The shutter can be released from a distance by using the optional remotecontrol unit (p.323).
You can select from the following two settings for remote control shooting.
The shutter is released immediately after the shutterh Remote Control release button on the remote control unit is pressed.
Remote Control The shutter is released about 3 seconds after the shutter
release button on the remote control unit is pressed.

i (3s delay)

1

Mount the camera onto a tripod.
4
Shooting Functions

2

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

3
4

Use the four-way controller (45) to select h.
Press the four-way controller (3)and use the four-way controller(45) to select hor i.

Drive Mode
Remote Control

The self-timer lamp will blink and thecamera is in a stand-by status.
MENU Cancel

5

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

OK OK

148

6

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.

7

4

Point the remote control unit
towards the remote control
receiver on the front of thecamera and press the shutter
release button on the remotecontrol unit.

4m

Shooting Functions

The operating distance of the remotecontrol unit is about 4 m from the front of the camera.
After a picture is taken, the self-timer lamp lights for 2 seconds and thenreturns to blinking.
• The remote control shooting is not available when the capture mode is set to\ (Moving Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene)mode.
• By default, you cannot adjust the focus with the remote control unit. Focus on
the subject first with the camera before operating with the remote control.
When [14. AF with Remote Control] is set to [On] in the [A Custom Setting 2]
menu (p.89), you can use the remote control unit to adjust the focus. (AFcannot be used with the remote control unit during Live View.)• When using the Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1, AF can be operated with
the S button. The { button cannot be used.
• When using the remote control unit, the built-in flash does not pop up
automatically even when set to g (Auto Flash Discharge). Press the K/
i button to pop up the built-in flash beforehand. (p.78)• Select a mode other than hor i in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel the
remote control shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned
off if [Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off when hor i is set.
• The exposure may be affected if light enters the viewfinder. Use the AE Lockfunction (p.120). The light entering the viewfinder has no effect on the
exposure when the mode dial is set to a (Manual).
• The remote control may not operate in backlit conditions.
• The Remote Control F can send a remote control signal about 30,000 times.
Contact a PENTAX Service Center to replace the battery (this will involve afee).

Taking Pictures Continuously

149

Continuous Shooting
Pictures can be taken continuously while the shutter release button is keptpressed.
The following two types of continuous shooting are available.
Continuous
Shooting (Hi)For JPEG image with E/C, up to 25 frames aretaken continuously at approximately 6 fps. The shootinginterval will increase as the buffer fills up.

hContinuous
Shooting (Lo)For JPEG image with E/C, pictures are taken
continuously at approximately 2 fps until the SD Memory
Card is full.

When the file format is [RAW], up to 12 frames for g and up to 36 frames forh can be taken continuously.

1

Press the four-way controller (2) in Capture mode.
The [Drive Mode] screen appears.

2
3

Use the four-way controller (45) to select g.
Press the four-way controller (3)and use the four-way controller(45) to select g or h.

Drive Mode
Continuous Shooting (Hi)MENU Cancel

4

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take pictures continuously.

5

Press the shutter release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates. The focus indicator ] appears in the
viewfinder when focused.

4
Shooting Functions

g

150

6

Press the shutter release button fully.
Pictures are taken continuously while the shutter release button is fullypressed. Take your finger off the shutter release button to stop.

4
Shooting Functions• The drive mode is fixed to g when the capture mode is set to \ (Moving
Object) of Picture mode, and R (Kids) or Y (Pet) of H (Scene) mode.
• If [AF Mode] is set to l (Single mode), the focus position is locked in thefirst frame and pictures are taken continuously at the same interval.
• Focusing is continuously activated during continuous shooting when
[AF Mode] is set to k (Continuous mode).
• The shutter cannot be released until charging is complete when using thebuilt-in flash. You can set the camera to enable shutter release before thebuilt-in flash is ready in [16. Release While Charging] of the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu. (p.81)• Select a mode other than g or h in the [Drive Mode] screen to cancel thecontinuous shooting. The setting is canceled when the camera is turned off
if [Drive Mode] is set to P (Off) in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu.
• The shooting speed may be slower when [Distortion Correction] or [LatChromatic-Ab Adj] (p.211) is set to [On].

151Interval Shooting
During Interval Shooting, pictures are taken at a set interval from a set time.
• Interval Shooting is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to C (Movie), or Z (Night Scene HDR) of
H (Scene) mode
- when the shutter speed is set to h
- when Digital Filter or HDR Capture is set• When Interval Shooting is set, Multi-exposure is not available.

1

Select [Interval Shooting] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
4The [Interval Shooting] screen appears.

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Interval].
When taking two or more pictures, set the
wait time until the next picture is taken.
Use the four-way controller (45) toselect the number of hours, minutes, andseconds, and use the four-way controller(23) to set the time.
You can set up to 24 hours, 00 minutes,
and 00 seconds.

3

Interval Shooting
Start Shooting
Interval

00 : 00 ' 00 "Number of Shots

002images

Start Interval

Now

Start TimeMENU Cancel

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of Shots].
Set the number of shots to be taken.
Press the four-way controller (45) and use the four-way controller(23) to select the number of shots to be taken.
You can select between 1 and 999 shots.

4

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start Interval].
Set the time when the first picture is taken.
Press the four-way controller (5) and use the four-way controller (23)to select [Now] or [Set Time].
Now

Shooting starts immediately. You can take two or more pictures.

Set
Time

Shooting starts at the set time. Press the four-way controller (3) toselect [Start Time], use the four-way controller (45) to select thetime, and use the four-way controller (23) to set the start time.

Shooting Functions

2

152

5

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a series of interval pictures.

6

Press the shutter release button
halfway.
The focus indicator ] appears when thesubject is in focus.

Interval ShootingStandbyRemaining Shots

100images

Interval

00 : 00 ' 00 "MENU Exit

4

7

Press the shutter release button fully.

Shooting Functions

When [Start Interval] is set to [Now], the first picture is taken. When set
to [Set Time], shooting starts at the set time.
For shooting multiple pictures, pictures are taken at the interval set in
Step 2.
After the set number of pictures is taken, the camera returns to normal
Capture mode.
• The camera cannot be operated during Interval Shooting. To cancel theInterval Shooting, press any button on the back of the camera or press the
shutter release button and the 3 button to display the exit confirmation
screen, and then use the four-way controller (23) to select [Exit] and press
the 4 button. You can also exit the Interval Shooting by turning the main
switch off or turning the mode dial.
• 9 (Single Frame Shooting) is selected regardless of the current drive modesetting.
• If the subject is not in focus with the focus mode set to l (Single mode)
or if the [Interval] setting is too short and the previous image processing
cannot be completed before taking the next picture, no picture may be taken.
• Although each shot taken is displayed on the monitor with Instant Review,
they cannot be enlarged or deleted.
• The [Interval] setting is disabled when [Number of Shots] is set to [1].
• Interval Shooting is canceled when the SD Memory Card has no moreavailable space.
• If the Auto Power Off function (p.281) turns the camera off during Interval
Shooting, the camera automatically turns on again when the shooting time
approaches.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) when using
the Interval Shooting over a long period of time. (p.50)

153

Multi-exposure
You can create a composite picture by taking multiple frames.
• Multi-exposure is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to C (Movie), or Z (Night Scene HDR) of
H (Scene) mode
- when Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set• When Multi-exposure is set, the following functions are not available.
- Exposure Bracketing or Interval Shooting (The function selected last is used)- Distortion Correction or Lateral Chromatic Aberration Adjustment

1

Select [Multi-exposure] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).

2
3

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Number of
Shots].
Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select the number ofshots.

Multi-exposure
Start Shooting
Number of Shots

2 times

Auto EV Adjustment

Select from 2 to 9 shots.
MENU Cancel

4
5

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto EV
Adjustment] and use the four-way controller (45) toselect O or P.
When set to O(On), the exposure is adjusted automatically according to
the number of shots.

6

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Start
Shooting] and press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.

Shooting Functions

The [Multi-exposure] screen appears.

4

154

7

Take the picture.
The composite picture is displayed in Instant Review each time the
shutter release button is pressed. Press the K/i button during
Instant Review to discard pictures taken up to that point and take pictures
again from the first frame.
The pictures are saved when the set number of shots is taken, and thenthe [Multi-exposure] screen appears again.

4
Shooting Functions• If any of the following operations are performed while shooting, the picturesthat have been already taken are saved and Multi-exposure is ended.
- when the Q button, 3 button, four-way controller (234) or M
button is pressed- when the mode dial is turned- when Exposure Bracketing is set• When shooting in Multi-exposure mode using Live View, a semi-transparent
composite image of the pictures taken is displayed.

Taking Pictures Using Digital Filters

155

You can apply a filter when taking pictures.
The following filters can be selected.
Filter Name

EffectParameter
Shading Level: +1 to +3

Toy Camera

For taking pictures that look as Blur: +1 to +3
if taken with a toy camera.
Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/
Yellow
For taking pictures with thelook of old photos.

High Contrast

For taking pictures with highcontrasts.

Toning: -3 to +3
Frame Composite: None/Thin/
Medium/Thick+1 to +5
Extracted Color 1: Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/
Yellow

Extract Color

For extracting two specificcolors and making the rest of
the image black and white.

Extractable Range of Color 1:-2 to +2
Extracted Color 2: Red/
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/
Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2:-2 to +2

Soft *1

For taking pictures with a soft
focus throughout the image.

Starburst *1

For taking pictures of night
scenes or lights reflected onwater with a special sparkling
look by adding extra glitter tothe highlights.

Soft Focus: +1 to +3
Shadow Blur: OFF/ON
Shape: Cross/Star/Snow
Crystal/Heart/Musical Note
Effect Density: Small/Medium/
Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°

Fish-eye *1

For taking pictures that look as
Weak/Medium/Strong
if taken with a fish-eye lens.

4
Shooting Functions

Retro

156
Filter Name

EffectParameter
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/
Blue/Yellow

CustomFilter *1

Customize and save a filter toyour own preferences.

Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/
Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON

4

Color *2

Shooting Functions

For taking pictures with theselected color filter. Choose
from 18 filters (6 colors ×3
tones).

Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow
Color Density: Light/Medium/
Dark*1 Not available when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).
*2 Available only when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).

• Digital Filter is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene)mode- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])• When Digital Filter is set, the following functions are not available- Continuous Shooting, Interval Shooting or Multi-exposure- HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)
Depending on the filter used, it may take longer to save images.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

2

3

157
Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [Digital Filter]and press the 4 button.

Digital Filter
Not use any filters

The screen for selecting a filter appears.
After the power is turned on, the last
image taken is displayed in the
background.

JPEG 12M

Use the four-way controller(45) to select a filter.

OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

[

37]

OFF

Starburst

4

4

Use the four-way controller(23) to select the parameter andthe four-way controller (45) toadjust the parameter’s value.

Check

OK OK

Shape

INFO
MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

Available operations

5

mc button

Uses Digital Preview to preview the backgroundimage with the filter effect applied. (Not available
when the capture mode is set to C (Movie).)

M button

Saves the background image. Select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.

Shooting Functions

INFO
MENU Cancel

158• You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.87).
• Set in [Movie] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu when the capture mode is set to
C (Movie). (p.165)• Select [Not use any filters] in Step 3 to finish shooting with digital filter.
• You can also apply digital filter effects to JPEG/RAW images after shooting
them in Playback mode. (p.253)

4
Shooting Functions

Shooting with Live View

159

You can shoot a picture while displaying the real-time image on themonitor.

• During Live View, nothing is displayed in the viewfinder.
• Holding the camera by hand and shooting while viewing the monitor may
cause camera shake. Use of a tripod is recommended.
• Live View is not displayed when data is being saved to an SD Memory Card.

4
Shooting Functions• The image in Live View may differ from the captured image if the brightnessof the subject is low or high.
• If any changes occur in the shooting light source during Live View, the image
may flicker.
• If the camera position is changed rapidly during Live View, the image may not
be displayed with the appropriate brightness. Wait for the display to become
stable before shooting.
• Noise may appear on the Live View image when used in dark locations.
• Live View can be displayed for up to 5 minutes. When Live View is ended
after the elapse of 5 minutes, Live View can be restarted by pressing the U
button.
• If you continue shooting with Live View for a prolonged period, the internal
temperature of the camera may increase, resulting in lower quality images. It
is recommended that you turn off Live View when not shooting. To preventthe image quality from degrading, allow enough time for the camera to cool
down while shooting with long exposures or recording movies.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high, l (temperature
warning) will appear on the monitor and Live View may not be available.
• If Live View is used in places where the camera may become hot, such as indirect sunlight, l (temperature warning) may appear on the monitor. Cancel
Live View, as the internal temperature of the camera is rising.
• If Live View is used even after l (temperature warning) appears, Live View
may end before 5 minutes elapse. Shooting with the viewfinder is available
even if Live View is ended.
• The higher the sensitivity, the more noise and color unevenness may occur
in the Live View image and/or captured image.

160

Setting Live View
You can set the display and autofocus method for Live View.

1

Select [Live View] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Live View] screen appears.

2
4

Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select an autofocus
method.

Live View

Shooting Functions

Autofocus Method
Show Grid
Info Overlay
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area

MENU Cancel

I

Face Detection
AF

i Contrast AF

S

3

Phase
Difference AF

OK OK

Gives autofocus priority to detected faces andperforms contrast autofocus. A yellow frame
appears for a main face (white frames appear forother faces), and autofocus and automatic exposure
are performed for the main face. (default setting)
The face detection is not performed when the focus
mode is set to \ (except when in I (AutoPicture)).
Displays Live View and performs autofocus basedon the information obtained from the image sensor.
Cancels Live View and performs autofocus with the
AF sensor.
If the shutter release button is pressed halfway
during Live View, the Live View image will disappear
and the autofocus system operates. Once focused,the Live View image will be displayed again.

Press the 4 button.

4
5

161
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Show Grid]and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select a grid display type andpress the 4 button.
Select from [Off] (default setting), e(4×4 Grid), f (Golden Section) or g
(Scale).

Live View
Autofocus Method
Show Grid
Info Overlay
Histogram
Bright/Dark Area

MENU Cancel

6

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Info Overlay],[Histogram] or [Bright/Dark Area].
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.
It takes more time to focus on the subject when using I or i than whenusing S. It is also difficult for the camera to focus on the following objects (orunder the following conditions).
- objects with poor contrast- objects with no vertical contrast, such as horizontal stripes- objects with constantly changing brightness, shape, or color, such as awater fountain- objects whose distance from the camera changes- small objects- objects appearing in both the foreground and background- when using a special filter- objects at the edge of the screen

4
Shooting Functions

7
8

OFF

162

Taking Still Pictures1

Select a Capture mode.
Set the mode dial to any mode other than C.

2

Press the U button.

4
Shooting Functions

The mirror pops up and a real-time image is displayed on the monitor.
Press the U button again to exit Live View.
Live View display(All of the indicators are displayed here for explanatory purposes.)

1

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

P SHIFT

P

9
10
11
12
13

+1.0
-3 2 1

2000 F2.8

14 15
1
2
3
4
5
6

1 2 +3
ISO 3200

16 17 18

[ 1234 ]2000 F2.8

19

20

Capture Mode
Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Multi-exposure/Interval
Shooting/Digital Filter/HDR
CaptureISO 400

[

37 ]

21

7

Number of shots using Multiexposure/Cross Processing

8
9
10
11

Battery level
Temperature warning
Contrast AF framePhase Difference AF frame/AF
point

163
12
13
14
15
16
17

EV Compensation
Histogram
AE Lock
Shutter speed
Aperture value
EV bar18 Sensitivity
19 Remaining image storage capacity
20 Main face detection frame (Face
Detection AF)
21 Face detection frame (Face
Detection AF)* Indicator 11 (Phase Difference AF frame) is displayed in white during
Live View. When the subject is in focus, a green square frame isdisplayed instead. It turns red when the subject is not in focus. It is not
displayed when the focus mode is set to \.
* When 15, 16, and 18 can be changed, 5 appears next to the set value.
* Indicators 20 and 21 are displayed when [Autofocus Method] is set to
I and the camera detects person’s face(s). (Up to 16 face recognition
frames are displayed on the monitor.)
Available operations
When the focusing area is set to S (Select) and[Autofocus Method] is set to i or S, press this button
to disable direct key operation of the four-way controller(2345) and enable changing the AF point.

Four-waycontroller(2345)

Changes the AF point when the AF point can be changed.
Press the 4 button to return AF point to the center of the
AF frame.

Press and hold Disables changing the AF point and enables direct key
4 button
operation of the four-way controller (2345).
M button

3

Enlarges the image to 2, 4, or 6 times (when the focus mode is
set to \, enlarges the image to 2, 4, 6, 8, or 10 times). Use
the four-way controller (2345) to move the display area,and press the | button to return the display area to the center.
(Available only when [Green Button] is assigned to the |button in [Green Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.197).)

Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.

4

Press the shutter release button fully.
The picture is taken.

Shooting Functions

4 button4

164• When [AF Mode] is set to k and [Autofocus Method] is set to I or i,the camera focuses on the center of the screen when autofocus starts andthen automatically tracks the subject when it is in focus.
• Images captured in magnified display are recorded at normal size.
• If [Optical Preview] or [Digital Preview] is assigned to the | button in [Green
Button] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu, you can check the depth of field in the
viewfinder when you press the | button. (p.137)
The status screen and control panel cannot be displayed during Live View. To
change the settings, press the 3 button and change them in each menu.

4
Shooting Functions

Recording Movies

165

You can record movies using Live View.

Changing the Movie Settings
You can record movies with a frame rate (number of frames shot per
second) at 25 frames per second (fps), monaural audio, and the file format
set to AVI.

1

Select [Movie] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).

2

3
4Press the four-way controller(5), use the four-way controller(23) to select the number ofrecorded pixels, and press the
4 button.

1280x720
Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Sound
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
Movie Aperture Control
Shake Reduction
MENU Cancel

Recorded Pixels

PixelsAspect Ratiob (default setting)

1280×720

16:9

c

640×480

4:3

00:00'00"

OFF

OFF

Fixed
OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Quality Level]and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select the quality
level and press the 4 button.
Select from C (Best; default setting), D (Better) and E (Good).
When the recorded pixels and quality level are changed, the amount ofrecordable time at that setting appears at the top right of the screen.

Shooting Functions

The [Movie] screen appears.

4

166

5
6

7

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Sound] andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select g or Z andpress the 4 button.
g

Records sound. (default setting)Z

Does not record sound.

Change the [Cross Processing] and [Digital Filter] settings
as necessary.
For details, refer to p.216 for Cross Processing and p.155 for Digital
Filter.

4
Shooting Functions

8
9

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Movie
Aperture Control] and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Fixed] or[Auto] and press the 4 button.
Fixed

The movie is recorded at the aperture value set before movie
recording starts. (default setting)

Auto

The aperture is controlled automatically. (The aperture value isfixed while recording a movie even if [Auto] is selected.)

10 Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Shake
Reduction] and press the four-way controller (5).

11 Use the four-way controller (23) to select k or land press the 4 button.
k

Uses Shake Reduction.

l

Does not use Shake Reduction. (default setting)

12 Press the 3 button twice.
The camera is ready to record a movie.

167

Recording Movies

1

Set the mode dial to C.

Live View for movie recording isdisplayed.

Sound

4

HD

F2.8

1 +2

00:30'00"

Recordable Time
Shake Reduction

Available operationssE-dialChanges the aperture value when [Movie Aperture
Control] is set to [Fixed]. (default setting)| button

Resets the aperture value when [Green Button] is
assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of the[A Rec. Mode 4] menu.
Displays the setting screen when [Custom Image],[Digital Filter] or [Cross Processing] is assigned to
the | button. (p.197)

mc button + e-dial

Adjusts the EV compensation (±2 EV).

4 button

When the focusing area is set to S (Select) and[Autofocus Method] is set to i or S, press thisbutton to disable direct key operation of the four-way
controller (2345) and enable changing the AF point.

Four-way controller(2345)

Changes the AF point when the AF point can bechanged.
Press the 4 button to return AF point to the centerof the AF frame.

Shooting Functions

+1.5
-2 1

168

2

Press and hold 4
buttonDisables changing the AF point and enables direct
key operation of the four-way controller (2345).

M button

Enlarges the image to 2, 4, or 6 times (when thefocus mode is set to \, enlarges the image to 2, 4,
6, 8, or 10 times). Use the four-way controller(2345) to move the display area.

Position the subject on the monitor and press the shutter
release button halfway.
The autofocus system operates.
When the focus mode is set to \, turn the focusing ring until the subject
is clearly visible on the focusing screen.

4

3

Press the shutter release button fully.

Shooting Functions

Recording of the movie starts.

4

Press the shutter release button again.
Recording stops.
• When [Sound] is set to g (On), the camera operation sounds are also
recorded. When recording a movie, mount the camera onto a tripod and do
not operate the camera while recording.
• When recording a movie, regardless of the AF mode setting, recording starts
when the shutter release button is pressed fully even if the subject is not in
focus.
• While recording a movie, the autofocus system does not operate.
• The flash is not available.
• When recording movies using image processing, such as Digital Filter, someframes may be omitted from the recorded movie.
• If the internal temperature of the camera becomes high during movie
recording, the recording may be terminated to protect the camera circuitry.
• You can record movies continuously up to 4 GB or 25 minutes. When the SD
Memory Card is full, recording stops and the movie is saved.
• Live View image in C mode is displayed according to the [Live View] setting(p.160) made in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. However, the histogram andBright/Dark Area warning are not displayed during movie recording.
• If you intend to shoot continuously for a long period, use of the AC adapter
kit K-AC109 (optional) is recommended. (p.50)• You can also use the optional remote control to record a movie. (p.147)• EV compensation is also available during movie recording.
• The sensitivity is fixed to [AUTO].

169

Playing Back Movies
Recorded movies can be played back in Playback mode in the samemanner as saved images.

1

Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.

2

Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie toplay back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.

4

Press the four-way controller(2).

100-0001

Movie playback starts.

Movie 10min00sec

Available operations
Four-way controller (2)Pauses/Resumes playback.

E-dialVolume control (6 levels)

Four-way controller (5)Forwards a frame (during pause).

Press and hold four-way
controller (5)Fast-forwards playback while pressed.

Four-way controller (4)Reverses playback./
Reverses a frame (during pause).

Press and hold four-way
controller (4)Fast-reverses playback while pressed.

Four-way controller (3)Stops playback./
Displays the playback mode palette (whenstopped). (p.220)

M button

Saves the displayed image as a JPEG file.

When the movie ends, playback stops and the first frame is displayed again.
You can use the optional AV cable I-AVC7 to play back recorded movies on a
TV screen or other AV devices. (p.242)

Shooting Functions3

170
Capturing a Still Picture from a Movie
You can capture a single frame from a movie and save it as a JPEG still
picture.

1

Press the four-way controller (2)in Step 3 on p.169 to pause themovie, and display the frame tosave as a still picture.

90/1800
INFO

Movie 10min00sec

4
Shooting Functions

2

Press the M button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The captured image is saved as a newimage.

Saves the image as a new file

Save asCancelOK OK

171

Editing Movies
Movies can be divided and unwanted segments can be deleted.

1

Press the Q button.
The camera switches to Playback mode.

2

Use the four-way controller (45) to choose a movie toplay back.
The first frame of the movie is displayed on the monitor.

3

Press the four-way controller (3).

4

4

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [ (Movie
Editing) and press the 4 button.
The movie editing screen appears.

5

Select point(s) where you want todivide the movie.
Up to four points can be selected.

00 min 00 sec
10 min 00 sec

MENU Exit

OK OK

Available operations
Four-way controller (2)Plays back/Pauses a movie.

Four-way controller (5)Moves forward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the next dividing point (during
playback).

Four-way controller (4)Moves backward 1 second (during pause).
Moves to the previous dividing point(during playback).

E-dialVolume control (6 levels)| button

Confirms/cancels a dividing point.

Shooting Functions

The playback mode palette appears.

172

6

Press the K/i button to delete unwanted segments.
The screen to select segment(s) to delete
is displayed.
00 min 02 sec
10 min 00 sec
Select segments for deletion
MENU ExitOK

Available operations
Four-way controller (45)Moves the selection frame.

4 button

Confirms/cancels a selection of a segment
to delete.

3 button

Exits the screen to select segments todelete.

4
Shooting Functions

7

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.
00 min 00 sec
10 min 00 sec

MENU Exit

8

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.
The movie is divided at the specified
points and the unwanted segments aredeleted from it. And then the divided
movie is saved as separate files anddisplayed on the screen.

OK OK

Saves divided movie
as separate files
Save asCancelMENU

OK OKSpecify the dividing points in chronological order from the beginning of themovie. When canceling the selected dividing points, cancel each of them inreverse order (from the end of the movie to the beginning). Dividing point(s)cannot be added or canceled while specifying dividing point(s).

5 Using the Flash
This chapter provides details on the built-in flash of the
W and describes how to take pictures with an external
flash.

Flash Characteristics in Each Exposure Mode.............................................................................. 174
Distance and Aperture when Using the Built-in
Flash .................................................................... 178
Lens Compatibility with the Built-in Flash ....... 179
Using an External Flash (Optional) .................. 180

174Flash Characteristics in Each
Exposure Mode
Using the Flash in b (Shutter Priority) Mode
• When taking a moving subject, you can use the flash to change the blureffect.
• Any desired shutter speed of 1/180 sec. or slower can be set for taking
a flash photograph.
• The aperture value automatically changes according to the ambient
brightness.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens is used.

Using the Flash in c (Aperture Priority) Mode
5
Using the Flash• You can set the desired aperture value to take a flash photograph when
you want to change the depth of field or shoot a subject farther away.
• The shutter speed automatically changes with the ambient brightness.
• The shutter speed shifts automatically anywhere from 1/180 sec. to aslow shutter speed (p.68) that reduces camera shake. The slowest
shutter speed depends on the focal length of the lens in use.
• The shutter speed is locked at 1/180 sec. when a lens other than a DA,
DA L, D FA, FA J, FA or F lens is used.

Using the Slow-speed Sync
You can use Slow-speed Sync in . (Night Scene Portrait) of Picturemode or b (Shutter Priority) mode when shooting portraits with the sunset
in the background. Both the portrait and the background are captured
beautifully.
• Slow-speed Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction function
or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid camera
shake. The picture will also blur if the subject moves.
• Slow-speed Sync shooting can also be performed with an external flash.

175
Using b Mode1
2

Set the mode dial to b.
Use the e-dial to set the shutter speed.
The background is not properly exposed if the aperture value is blinking
when the shutter speed is set. Adjust the shutter speed so that theaperture value does not blink.

3

Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up.

4

Take a picture.

Using e/K/c Mode
Set the mode dial to e, K or c.
Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up.

3

Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

4

Select G or H and press the 4 button.
The shutter speed is set slower to give a proper exposure for the
background.

5

Take a picture.

Using the Flash

1
2

5

176
Using a Mode1
2

Set the mode dial to a.
Set the shutter speed and aperture value to obtain aproper exposure.
Set 1/180 sec. shutter speed or slower.

3

Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up.
In a (Manual) mode, you can raise the built-in flash at any time prior toshooting.

4

Take a picture.

5
Using the Flash

Using the Trailing Curtain Sync
Trailing Curtain Sync discharges the flash immediately before the shutter
curtain closes. When shooting moving objects with a slow shutter speed,
Trailing Curtain Sync and Slow-speed Sync produce different effects
depending on when the flash is discharged.
For example, when shooting a moving car with Trailing Curtain Sync,
trailing light is captured while the shutter is open and the flash captures the
car immediately before the shutter is closed. Therefore, the picture will
include a sharp, well-lit car with trailing light behind it.

Slow-speed Sync
(Leading Curtain Sync)

Trailing Curtain Sync

1
2

177
Set the mode dial to e, K, b, c or a.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

34

Select I or k and press the 4 button.
Press the K/i button.
The built-in flash pops up.

5

Take a picture.
Trailing Curtain Sync slows the shutter speed. Use the Shake Reduction
function or turn off the Shake Reduction function and use a tripod to avoid
camera shake.

5
Using the Flash178

Distance and Aperture when Using
the Built-in Flash
Relationships between the guide number, aperture and distance must be
considered when shooting with the flash to obtain a correct exposure.
Calculate and adjust the shooting conditions if the flash output is not sufficient.
Sensitivity
ISO 100 *1
ISO 200
ISO 400
ISO 800
ISO 1600

Built-in Flash
Guide Number
Approx. 12
Approx. 16
Approx. 24
Approx. 32
Approx. 48

Sensitivity
ISO 3200
ISO 6400
ISO 12800 *1
ISO 25600 *1

Built-in Flash
Guide Number
Approx. 64
Approx. 96
Approx. 128
Approx. 192*1 This can be used when [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu is set
to [On].

5

Calculating Shooting Distance from Aperture Value

Using the FlashThe following equation calculates the distance of the flash for aperture values.
Maximum flash distance L1 = Guide number ÷ Aperture value
Minimum flash distance L2 = Maximum flash distance ÷ 5 ** The value 5 used in the formula above is a fixed value
which applies only when using the built-in flash alone.

Example)When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the aperture value is F4.0
L1 = 16 ÷ 4.0 = approx. 4 (m)L2 = 4 ÷ 5 = approx. 0.8 (m)Therefore, the flash can be used in a range of about 0.8 m to 4 m.
However, the built-in flash in this camera cannot be used when the distanceis 0.7 m or less. When the flash is used at closer than 0.7 m, it causes
vignetting in the picture corners, light is distributed unevenly and a picture
may be overexposed.

Calculating Aperture Value from Shooting Distance
The following equation calculates the aperture value for shooting distances.
Aperture value F = Guide number ÷ Shooting distance
Example)When the sensitivity is ISO 200 and the shooting distance is 5 m, theaperture value is:
F = 16 ÷ 5 = 3.2
If the resulting number (3.2, in the above example) is not available as alens aperture, the smaller number that is closest (2.8, in the above
example) is generally used.

Lens Compatibility with the Built-in
Flash

179

Depending on the lens used with the W, even if a lens without a hoodis attached, the use of the built-in flash may not be available or may belimited due to vignetting.
DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, and FA lenses not listed below can be used without
problems.
* The following lenses were evaluated without a hood.
Unavailable due to vignetting
Lens Name
DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm F3.5-4.5ED (IF)DA12-24mm F4ED AL
DA14mm F2.8ED (IF)FA300mm F2.8ED (IF)5

Available depending on other factors
Lens Name

Restrictions

F FISH-EYE 17-28mm F3.5-4.5

Vignetting may occur if the focal length is lessthan 20 mm.

DA16-45mm F4ED AL

When the focal length is less than 28 mm orwhen the focal length is 28 mm and theshooting distance is 1 m or less, vignetting
may occur.

DA16-50mm F2.8ED AL (IF) SDM

When the focal length is 20 mm or less or when
the focal length is 35 mm and the shooting
distance is less than 1.5 m, vignetting may occur.

DA17-70mm F4AL (IF) SDM

When the focal length is less than 24 mm orwhen the focal length is 24 mm and the shooting
distance is 1 m or less, vignetting may occur.

DA18-250mm F3.5-6.3ED AL (IF)Vignetting may occur if the focal length is lessthan 35 mm.

FA28-70mm F2.8AL

Vignetting may occur if the focal length is 28
mm and the shooting distance is less than 1 m.

FA SOFT 28mm F2.8

Built-in flash always discharges fully.

FA SOFT 85mm F2.8

Built-in flash always discharges fully.

Using the FlashFA600mm F4ED (IF)FA250-600mm F5.6ED (IF)180

Using an External Flash (Optional)
Using an optional external flash AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC enables a variety of flash modes, such as P-TTL auto flash
mode, depending on the external flash being used. See the chart below for
details.
(z: Available#: Restricted

Camera Function

5

×: Not available)
Flash Built-in
AF540FGZ
Flash AF360FGZ

AF200FG
AF160FC

Using the Flash

Red-eye reduction flash

z

z

z

Auto flash discharge

z

z

z

After the flash is charged, the camera
automatically switches to the flash sync speed.

z

z

z

Aperture value is automatically set in emode and b mode.

z

z

z

z*1

z*1

*1

P-TTL auto flashz

Slow-speed Sync

z

z

z

Flash exposure compensation

z

z

z

AF assist light of external flash

×

z

×

Trailing Curtain Sync*2

z

z

×

Contrast-control-sync flash mode

#*3

z

#*4

Slave flash

×

z

×

High-speed flash sync

×

z

×

Wireless flash

#*4

z*5

×

*1 Available only when using a DA, DA L, D FA, FA J, FA, F or A lens.
*2 Shutter speed of 1/90 sec. or slower.
*3 When combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, 1/3 of the flash discharge can be
output by the built-in flash and 2/3 can be output by the external flash.
*4 Available only when combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
*5 Multiple AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ units, or a combination of an AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ
unit and the built-in flash is required.

Flashes with reversed polarity (the center contact on the hot shoe is minus)
cannot be used due to the risk of damaging the camera and flash.

181
About the Display Panel for AF360FGZ
The AF360FGZ itself does not have the function to set the FORMAT
size to [DIGITAL]. However, when it is used with a SLR Digital
Camera, the difference in focal length between a 35 mm camera andthe W is automatically calculated based on the difference in angleof view and is displayed on the panel (when using DA, DA L, D FA,
FA J, FA or F lens).
The conversion indicator appears and the FORMAT size indicator
disappears when the exposure metering timer of the W is on (itreturns to 35 mm format display when the exposure metering timer is turned off).
Lens Focal Length

85mm
/77mm

50mm

35mm

28mm
/24mm

20mm

18 mm

Exposure metering
timer Off

85mm

70mm

50mm

35mm

28mm

24mm*

Exposure metering
timer On

58mm

48mm

34mm

24mm

19mm

16mm*

Using P-TTL Auto Mode
You can use [P-TTL Auto] with the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit. The flash pre-flashes before the actual flash andconfirms the subject (the distance, brightness, contrast, whether it isbacklit, etc.) using the camera 16-segment metering sensor. The flash
output for the actual flash is adjusted based on the information obtained
from the pre-flash, enabling flash photography with more accurate
exposure for the subject than with normal TTL auto.

1
2
3
4

Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
Set the external flash mode to [P-TTL auto].
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and thentake a picture.

5
Using the Flash* Using wide-angle panel

182• P-TTL auto is only available with an AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or
AF160FC flash unit.
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• For details such as operation method and effective distance, please refer tothe external flash manual.
• The flash does not discharge if the subject is bright enough when the flash
mode is set to C or i. Therefore, it may not be suitable for daylight-sync
shooting.
• Never press the K/i button when any external flash unit is attached tothe camera. The built-in flash will hit the external flash. If you want to use bothat once, set the wireless mode or connect them using the extension cord.
(p.187).

Using High-Speed Flash Sync Mode
5With the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ, you can discharge the flash to take apicture at a shutter speed faster than 1/180 second.

Using the Flash

1
2
3
4
5

Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) to the camera.
Set the mode dial to b or a.
Turn on the camera and the external flash.
Set the external flash sync mode to HSb (high-speed
flash sync).
Confirm that the external flash is fully charged and thentake a picture.
• The b will light in the viewfinder when the flash is ready (fully charged).
• High-speed flash sync is available only when the shutter speed is set fasterthan 1/180 sec.
• High-speed flash sync is not available when the shutter speed is set to h.

183

Using Flash in Wireless Mode
By using two external flashes (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) or using thebuilt-in flash with one or more external flashes, you can shoot in P-TTL
flash mode without connecting the flash units with a cord.
• Set the power switch of the external flash to WIRELESS.
• Two or more AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes are required to use
high-speed flash sync in wireless mode. This function cannot be used in
combination with the built-in flash.
• Set the wireless mode of the external flash not directly connected to thecamera to SLAVE.

Setting the Channel for the External FlashFirst, set the channel for the external flash unit.

3

Set the channel for the external flash unit.
Remove the cover of the hot shoe and attach the external
flash.
Turn on the camera and the external flash, and press the
shutter release button halfway.
The built-in flash is set to the same channel as the external flash unit.
• When set to r mode, the channel currently set for the built-in flash isdisplayed in the viewfinder for 10 seconds.
• Be sure to set all the flashes to the same channel. Refer to the manual of the
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ for details on how to set the channel on theexternal flash.

Using the Flash

1
2

5

184
Using the Built-in Flash in Wireless Mode
Set the camera to wireless flash mode when using an external flash incombination with the built-in flash.

1

Press the four-way controller (3).
The [Flash Mode] screen appears.

2

Select r and press the 4
button.

Flash Mode
Wireless Mode

The camera is ready to take a picture.

0.0
MENU Cancel

5

OK OK

Using the FlashWhen the drive mode is set to i (Remote Control (3s delay)) or the lens
aperture is not set to the s position, r cannot be selected.

Changing the Built-in Flash Discharge Method
You can change the built-in flash discharge method used in wirelessmode.
Set in [17. Flash in Wireless Mode] of the [A Custom Setting 3] menu
(p.90).
1

On

Discharges the built-in flash as a master. (default setting)2

OffDischarges the built-in flash as a control flash.

HSb (High-speed flash sync) is not available with the built-in flash.

185
Wireless Shooting
Using a Combination of the Built-in Flash and an External Flash
Unit

1
2
3

Remove the external flash unit after the channel is set on
the camera, and place it at the desired location.
Set the camera flash to r mode, and press the K/ibutton.
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then takea picture.
Using a Combination of External Flash Units2
3

Set the wireless mode of the external flash directly
connected to the camera to [MASTER] or [CONTROL].
MASTER

Sets the camera to discharge both the flash directly
connected to the camera and the wireless flash unit.

CONTROL

Sets the camera to discharge the flash directly connectedto the camera as a control flash only, not as the main flash.

On the wireless remote flash unit, set the wireless flash
mode to [SLAVE] and set the channel to the same channel
as the flash directly connected to the camera. Then, place
it at the desired location.
Confirm that both flashes are fully charged and then takea picture.
• The Shake Reduction function is automatically turned off in wireless mode.
• When using multiple AF540FGZ/AF360FGZ external flashes and performing
high-speed flash sync shooting in wireless mode, set the flash directly
connected to the camera to high-speed flash sync mode.

Using the Flash

1

5

186
Wireless Flash Control (P-TTL Flash Mode)
When using external flash units (AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ) for
wireless shooting, the following information is exchanged between
the flash units before the flash is discharged.
Press the shutter release button fully.
È
1 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash(relays the flash mode of the camera).
2 The wireless remote flash emits a test flash (relays confirmationof subject).
3 The flash directly connected to the camera emits a control flash(relays flash output to the wireless remote flash).

5* The flash directly connected to the camera will emit a control flash one
more time after this to relay the flash duration time when HSb (Highspeed sync) is set.

Using the Flash

4 The wireless remote flash discharges as the main flash.
When the wireless mode of the external flash directly connected to thecamera is set to [MASTER] or [17. Flash in Wireless Mode] (p.184) is set
to [On] for the built-in flash, all the flashes will discharge simultaneously.

Red-Eye Reduction
As with the built-in flash, the red-eye reduction function is available
with an external flash. However, this function may not be available onsome flashes or may have restrictions for usage conditions. Refer tothe chart on p.180.
• The red-eye reduction function works by discharging the flash twice
even when only an external flash is used. (p.79)• If the red-eye reduction function of the built-in flash is used when theexternal flash is set as the slave unit or with the wireless function, thepre-flash for red-eye reduction will trigger the external flash. Do not use
the red-eye reduction function when using a slave unit.

187
Trailing Curtain Sync
When using the built-in flash with an external flash (AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ) that is set to the Trailing Curtain Sync mode, the built-in
flash will also use this mode. Confirm that both flash units are fully
charged before shooting.

Connecting an External Flash with an
Extension Cord

When combining with the built-in flash

5
Using the FlashWhen using the built-in flash with an external flash that does not have awireless flash mode function such as AF200FG, attach the Hot Shoe
Adapter FG (optional) to the camera hot shoe and an Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) to the bottom of the external flash, and connect thesewith the Extension Cord F5P (optional) as shown in the illustration below.
The Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F can be mounted to your tripod using the
tripod screw.
Only a P-TTL auto flash can be used in combination with the built-in flash.

188

Multiple Flash Shooting Using Extension
Cords
You can combine two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or you can use two or more external flashes in combination withthe built-in flash. You can use the extension cord connection terminal on
the flash to connect the AF540FGZ. You can connect AF360FGZ or
AF200FG units as shown in the illustration below. Connect an external
flash and the Hot Shoe Adapter F (optional) to the Off-Camera Shoe
Adapter F (optional) and then connect another Off-Camera Shoe Adapter
F with external flash using the Extension Cord F5P (optional).
Refer to the manual of the external flash for details.
When combining two or more external flashes
5
Using the Flash• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts
such as a Hot Shoe Grip as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.
When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the built-in
flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.

189

Contrast-Control-Sync Flash
Combining two or more external flashes (AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or
AF200FG) or using an external flash in combination with the built-in flash
allows multiple flash photography (contrast-control-sync flash
photography). This is based on the difference between the amounts oflight discharged from multiple units.
• The AF200FG must be combined with the AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ.
• Do not combine with accessories that have a different number of contacts,
such as a Hot Shoe Grip, as a malfunction may occur.
• Combining with flashes from other manufacturers may cause equipment
breakdown. We recommend using the AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ or AF200FG.

1

Connect the external flash to the camera indirectly.
Refer to p.187.

3
4

Set the sync mode for the external flash to contrastcontrol-sync mode.
Set the mode dial to e, K, b, c or a.
Confirm that both the external flash and built-in flash are
fully charged and then take a picture.
• When using two or more external flashes and the contrast-control-sync modeis set on the external master flash unit, the flash output ratio is 2 (masterunit) : 1 (slave units). When an external flash is used in combination with thebuilt-in flash, the flash output ratio is 2 (external flash) : 1 (built-in flash).
• When using multiple external flashes or using an external flash with the builtin flash, P-TTL is used for flash control.

Using the Flash

2

5

190

Memo

6 Shooting Settings
This chapter describes how to set the save format for
pictures taken and other settings.

Setting a File Format .......................................... 192
Setting the Green Button Function .................. 197
Setting the White Balance .................................. 200
Correcting Images .............................................. 207
Setting the Image Finishing Tone ..................... 213

Setting a File Format

192

Setting the JPEG Recorded Pixels
You can select the number of recorded pixels from E, J, P and i.
The more pixels there are, the larger the picture and the bigger the filesize. The file size will also vary according to the [JPEG Quality] setting.
The default setting is E.

6

Recorded Pixels

PixelsPaper SizeE

4288×2848

14"×17" / A2 paper

J

3936×2624

10"×12" / A3 paperP

3072×2048

8"×10" / A4 paperi1728×1152

5"×7" / A5 paper

Shooting Settings

The paper sizes above are references for optimal printing by recorded
pixels. The quality of the captured photo or printed picture depends on thequality level, exposure control, resolution of the printer and a variety ofother factors.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [JPEG
Recorded Pixels] and press the
4 button.
The [JPEG Recorded Pixels] screen
appears.

JPEG Recorded Pixels
4288x2848
OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M

[

37]

193

3

Use the four-way controller(45) to select the number ofrecorded pixels.
When the number of recorded pixels ischanged, the number of recordable
images appears at the top right of thescreen.

4

128

JPEG Recorded Pixels
4288x2848

12M

10M

6M

2M

MENU Cancel

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).

Setting the JPEG Quality Level

C Best1

D

BetterE

Good

Images will be clearer but file size will be larger.
Images will be grainier but file size will be smaller.

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

6
Shooting Settings

You can set the image quality level (compression ratio). The file size will
also vary according to the [JPEG Recorded Pixels] setting. The default
setting is C (Best).

194

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [JPEG
Quality] and press the 4
button.
The [JPEG Quality] screen appears.

JPEG Quality

OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M[

3

Use the four-way controller(45) to select a quality level.

37]

JPEG Quality

128

MENU Cancel

OK OK

When the quality level is changed, thenumber of recordable images at that
quality level appears at the top right of thescreen.

6

4

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.

Shooting Settings

You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).

195

Setting the File Format
You can set the format of image files.
Captures images in JPEG format (default setting).
JPEG You can change the number of recorded pixels in [JPEG Recorded
Pixels], and the image quality level in [JPEG Quality].

RAW

RAW format is a CMOS sensor output format saved without processing.
Effects of White Balance, Custom Image and Color Space are notapplied to the captured images, but they are saved as actual original
information. When you perform the development process by using RAW
Development function (p.259), or using the provided software (PENTAX
Digital Camera Utility 4) after transferring RAW data to a computer, you
can create JPEG images with these effects.

RAW+

Images are saved in both RAW and JPEG formats.
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | button, you can press
the | button to temporarily change the file format and save an image inboth file formats. (p.198)

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [File Format]
and press the 4 button.
The [File Format] screen appears.

File Format

OFF

OFF

HDR
OFF

AF.A

JPEG 12M[

37]

6
Shooting Settings

When Digital Filter, HDR Capture or Cross Processing is set, the file format isfixed to [JPEG] and cannot be changed. To change the file format, turn thesefunctions off.

196

3

Use the four-way controller(45) to select a file format.
When the file format is changed, thenumber of recordable images appears at
the top right of the screen.

128

File Format

JPEG

RAW

MENU Cancel

4

RAW+

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).
• The file format is fixed to [JPEG] when the capture mode is set to n (Stage
Lighting), l (Night Snap) or Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode.

Setting the RAW File Format
6
Shooting Settings

You can select PEF or DNG format in [RAWFile Format] of the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu
(p.88) when capturing images in RAW format.

1 2 3 4

Color SpaceRAW File Format
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
MemoryShake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU Cancel

sRGB
PEF
DNG

AF1
35mm
OK OK

PEF PENTAX’s original RAW file format (default setting)
DNG

General-purpose, publicly available RAW file format designed by Adobe
Systems

Setting the Green Button Function

197

You can assign one of the following functions to the | button and accessthe function by simply pressing the button while shooting.
Green Button

Resets the values being adjusted. (default setting)Custom Image

Sets the Custom Image settings. (p.213)

Optical Preview

Displays the Optical Preview. (p.139)

Digital Preview

Displays the Digital Preview. (p.140)

Digital Filter

Sets the Digital Filter. (p.155)

Cross Processing

Sets the Cross Processing. (p.216)

One Push File
FormatTemporarily changes the file format. Simultaneously saves
an image in both JPEG and RAW format, regardless of the[File Format] setting. You can set whether to apply thesetting to only one image or not, and select the file format
when the | button is pressed. (p.198)

1

The [Green Button] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller(5).

Green Button
Green Button
Action in M Mode
E-dial in ProgramMENU

P LINEP SHIFT

6
Shooting Settings

Select [Green Button] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).

198

3

4

Use the four-way controller(23) to select a function toassign to the | button, andpress the 4 button.

Green Button
Green Button
Custom Image
Optical Preview
Digital Preview
Digital Filter
Cross Processing
RAW One Push File Format
OK OK
MENU Cancel

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Setting the One Push File Format
When [One Push File Format] is assigned to the | button, specify thefunction settings.

6

1

Shooting Settings

2
3

Select [One Push File Format] in Step 3 of “Setting theGreen Button Function”.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Cancel after 1
shot].
Use the four-way controller(45) to select O or P.

Green Button
RAW One Push File Format

Cancel after 1 shot
JPEG

RAW+

RAW

RAW+

RAW+

RAW+

MENU

O

The recording format returns to the original file format after apicture is taken. (default setting)
The setting is canceled when the following operations are
performed.

P- the | button is pressed again- the Q button or 3 button is pressed- the main switch is turned off- the mode dial is turned

4

199
Use the four-way controller (23) to choose a file format.
The left side is the [File Format] setting and the right side is the file format
when the | button is pressed.

5

Press the four-way controller(5), and use the four-way
controller (23) to select a fileformat when the | button ispressed.

Green Button
RAW One Push File Format

Cancel after 1 shot
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
MENU Cancel

6
7

RAW+
JPEG
RAW
RAW+
RAW+
RAW+
OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

6
Shooting Settings

200

Setting the White BalanceWhite balance is a function for adjusting the color of an image so that white
objects appear white. Set the white balance if you are not satisfied with thecolor balance of pictures taken with white balance set to F (Auto), or
to intentionally apply a creative effect to your images.
Item
F AutoG

Daylight

Settings

Color
Temperature *1

Automatically adjusts the white balance.
(default setting)Approx. 4,000
to 8,000K

For use when taking pictures in sunlight. Approx. 5,200K

H ShadeFor use when taking pictures in theshade. It reduces the bluish color tones
in a picture.

Approx. 8,000K^ Cloudy

For use when taking pictures on cloudydays.

Approx. 6,000K

6Shooting Settings

J

FluorescentLight

For use when taking pictures underfluorescent lighting. Select the type offluorescent light.
D Fluorescent Light Daylight Color
N Fluorescent Light Daylight WhiteW Fluorescent Light Cool White
L Fluorescent Light Warm WhiteApprox. 6,500K
Approx. 5,000K
Approx. 4,200K
Approx. 3,000K

I Light

For use when taking pictures under lightbulbs or other tungsten light. It reduces
the reddish color tones in a picture.

Approx. 2,850K

L FlashFor use when taking pictures using thebuilt-in flash.

Approx. 5,400K

CTE *2

Use this to keep and strengthen thecolor tone of the light source in theimage.

–K Manual

Use this to manually adjust the whitebalance according to the lighting so thatwhite objects appear as a natural white.

–

Tungsten*1 The color temperatures (K) shown above are all estimates. These do not indicate precise
colors.
*2 CTE= Color Temperature Enhancement

White balance is fixed to F when the capture mode is set to Picture modeor H (Scene) mode, or when Cross Processing is set.

1
2

201
Set the mode dial to e, K, b, c, or a.
Press the four-way controller (4) in Capture mode.
The [White Balance] screen appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.

3

Press the four-way controller(23) to select the white balance.

White Balance
Auto

CTE

INFO
MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

Available operations
Uses Digital Preview to preview the backgroundimage with the setting applied.

M button

Saves the background image. Select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
Because the light source changes when a flash discharges, you can set thewhite balance for when the flash discharges. Select [Auto White Balance],[Unchanged] or [Flash] in [12. WB When Using Flash] of the [A Custom
Setting 2] menu (p.89).

6
Shooting Settings

4

mc button

202
Color Temperature
The color of light shifts towards blue as the color temperature rises, andtowards red as the color temperature falls. Color temperature describes
this change in light color in terms of absolute temperature (K: Kelvin).
This camera is capable of setting the white balance to enable taking
pictures with natural coloring under a variety of lighting conditions.
Red tint
2000

4000

5000 6000

8000

10000 12000 [ K ]Clear sky

Shade

Daylight (Fluorescent light)

CloudyShooting Settings

Daylight Flash
Neutral white (Fluorescent light)

White (Fluorescent light)

Halogen light bulb

Tungsten light

Oil lamp

Candle flame

6

3000

Blue tint

Adjusting the White Balance Manually
You can adjust the white balance depending on the light source when taking
pictures. With the manual white balance, the camera can store delicate shadesthat cannot be precisely adjusted with the white balance preset values provided
in the camera. This provides the optimum white balance for your surroundings.

1

Select K in Step 3 on p.201 andpress the four-way controller(5).

White Balance
ManualCTE

MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

2
3

203
Under the light to measure the white balance, fully display
a white sheet of paper in the viewfinder or select a whitearea as the subject.
Press the shutter release button fully.
Set the focus mode lever to \ when the shutter cannot be released.
The screen to select the measuring range is displayed.

4

Use the e-dial to select the entire
screen or spot area for themeasuring range.

MENU Cancel

5

OK OK

When a spot area is selected, use
the four-way controller (2345)
to move the frame to the position
you want to measure.

6

6

Press the 4 button.
The white balance fine-tuning screen
appears when measuring is completed.
Adjust the white balance as necessary.
(p.204)

OK OK

ManualWhite Balance
SHUTTER Adjust

±0

±0

G
A

B
M

±0
MENU Cancel

7

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.

INFO

Check

OK OK

Shooting Settings

MENU Cancel

204

8

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
• No image is recorded when the shutter release button is pressed to adjust
the white balance.
• The message [The operation could not be completed correctly] appears
when measuring is unsuccessful. Press the 4 button while displayed toremeasure the white balance.
• If a picture is extremely overexposed or underexposed, the white balance
may not be adjusted. In this case, adjust exposure to the correct amount level
before adjusting the white balance.
• When the mode dial is set to C (Movie), the white balance cannot bemeasured. Adjust the white balance in any capture mode other than C
before recording a movie.

Fine-Tuning the White Balance
You can fine-tune the white balance setting.
6
Shooting Settings

1
2

Perform the desired setting in Step 3 on p.201.
Press the four-way controller (5).
The fine-tuning screen appears.

3

Fine-tune the white balance.

Shade

Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.

G

G1

±0

A

B
M

±0
MENU Cancel

Check

OK OK

Available operations
Four-way controller (23)Adjusts the tone of the colors between
green (G) and magenta (M).

Four-way controller (45)Adjusts the tone of the colors between
blue (B) and amber (A).

| button

Resets the adjustment value. (Available
only when [Green Button] is assigned to |button in [Green Button] of the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu (p.197).)

4

205
Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [White Balance] screen.

5

Press the 4 button.
The camera is ready to take a picture.
When set to K, the white balance can also be measured by pressing the
shutter release button fully (except while recording a movie).

Setting the Color SpaceYou can select a color space to use.
sRGB
AdobeRGB

Sets to sRGB color space. (default setting)Sets to AdobeRGB color space.

6

1 2 3 4

Color SpaceRAW File Format
Green Button
AF/AE-L Button
MemoryShake Reduction
Input Focal Length
MENU Cancel

sRGB
PEF
AdobeRGB

AF1
35mm
OK OK

The file naming system changes depending on the color space setting as
shown below.
For sRGB: IMGPxxxx.JPG
For AdobeRGB: _IGPxxxx.JPG“xxxx” indicates the file number. This is displayed as a four-digit sequential
number. (p.280)

Shooting Settings

Set [Color Space] in the [A Rec. Mode 4]
menu (p.88).

206
Color Space
Color ranges for various input/output devices, such as digital
cameras, monitors, and printers, differ. This color range is called theColor Space.
To recreate different color spaces in different devices, standard color
spaces have been proposed. This camera supports sRGB and
AdobeRGB.
sRGB is mainly used for devices such as a computer.
AdobeRGB covers a wider range of color than sRGB and is used for
occupational uses such as industrial printing.
An image created in AdobeRGB may appear lighter than an image
created in sRGB when output from an sRGB compatible device.

6
Shooting Settings

Correcting Images

207

The camera and lens properties can be automatically adjusted for when
taking pictures.

Adjusting Brightness
Adjusts the brightness and reduces the occurrence of overexposed andunderexposed areas.

Highlight Correction
Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation
expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence ofoverexposed areas.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.

62

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Highlight
Correction] and press the 4 button.
The [Highlight Correction] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select [Off] or [On].

Highlight Correction
Off

DR
200

MENU Cancel

4

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.

OK OK

Shooting Settings

The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

208• When [Highlight Correction] is set to [On], the minimum sensitivity is set toISO 400. If [3. Expanded Sensitivity] in the [A Custom Setting 1] menu (p.89)
is set to [On], the sensitivity is set to ISO 200.
• [Highlight Correction] is fixed to [On] when the capture mode is set ton (Stage Lighting) or l (Night Snap) of H (Scene) mode.

Shadow Correction
Expands the dynamic range and enables a more ample gradation
expression by the CMOS sensor and reduces the occurrence ofunderexposed areas.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

2
6

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Shadow
Correction] and press the 4 button.

Shooting Settings

The [Shadow Correction] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select [Off], [Low], [Medium] or[High].

Shadow Correction
Off

MENU Cancel

4

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also set Highlight Correction and Shadow Correction in [D-Range
Setting] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu (p.88).

209
HDR Capture
Enables capturing images at high dynamic range. Takes three images(-3EV underexposed, standard (proper exposure) and +3EV
overexposed) to create a single composite image with them.
• HDR Capture is not available in the following situations.
- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])- when the shutter speed is set to h
• When HDR Capture is set, the following functions are not available.
- Continuous Shooting, Exposure Bracketing, Interval Shooting or Multiexposure- Flash modes other than a (Flash Off)- Digital Filter or Cross Processing (The function selected last is used)• During HDR Capture, multiple images are combined together to create asingle image, so it will take time to save an image.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

Shooting Settings

2

6

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [HDR
Capture] and press the 4 button.
The [HDR Capture] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select [Off], [Auto], [Standard],[Strong 1], [Strong 2] or [Strong
3].

HDR Capture
Off
HDR
OFF

HDR

AUTO

HDR

MENU Cancel

4

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.

HDR

HDR

HDR

OK OK

210
• During HDR Capture, pressing the 3 button while an image is being
saved cancels the process and saves the image as a standard image.
• HDR Capture is fixed to [Auto] and [Auto Align] is set to O (On) when thecapture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene) mode.
• You can set the [HDR Capture] setting
HDR Capture
from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.87). If
HDR
HDR Capture
AUTO
you use the menu, you can also set theAuto Align[Auto Align] setting.

6

P

Does not use Shake
Reduction regardless of the
Shake Reduction setting.
(default setting)O

Turns Shake Reduction on or
off according to the Shake
Reduction setting.

MENU

Shooting Settings• When both [Shake Reduction] and [Auto Align] are set to on, be careful of thefollowing points.
- Make sure to hold the camera firmly so that the composition of the picture
does not change while the three images are taken. If there is a great
difference of the composition between three images, [Auto Align] may not
be possible.
- Images taken with HDR Capture are susceptible to camera shake and blur.
Be sure to set a higher shutter speed and a higher ISO sensitivity.
- When the ISO sensitivity is set to AUTO, the sensitivity can be raised moreeasily than normal.
- [Auto Align] may not be possible for lenses that have a focal length
exceeding 100 mm.
- When the entire subject is checkered or has a uniform surface, [Auto Align]
may not be possible.

211

Lens Correction
Reduces distortions and lateral chromatic aberrations occurring due tolens properties.
Distortion
Distortion is the phenomenon in which the center of the image appears
inflated (barrel distortion) or the center of the image appears pinched(pincushion distortion). Distortion occurs more easily when using azoom lens or a small diameter lens, and straight walls or the horizon in
the image appear curved.

6
Barrel distortion

Lateral chromatic aberration
Lateral chromatic aberration is the phenomenon in which themagnification of the image varies according to the colors (wavelengthsof light) when a picture was taken, and may cause a blurred image.
Chromatic aberration occurs more easily at shorter focal lengths.

Shooting Settings

Pincushion distortion

212• Corrections can only be made when using DA, DA L, D FA or some FA lenses(p.312). [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] cannot be
selected when an incompatible lens is attached.
• [Distortion Correction] is disabled when using a DA FISH-EYE 10-17mm.
• The Lens Correction function is disabled when using an accessory such as aclose-up ring or rear converter that is attached between the camera and thelens.
• The shooting speed for continuous shooting may be slower when the Lens
Correction function is activated.
• The effects of the Lens Correction function may be barely noticeable in somecases due to the shooting conditions or other factors.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

2
6

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Distortion
Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] and press the 4
button.
The [Distortion Correction] or [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] screen appears.

Shooting Settings

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select [Off] or [On].

Distortion Correction
Off

MENU Cancel

4

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
• When a compatible lens is attached and the file format is set to [RAW] or[RAW+], the correction information is saved as a RAW file parameter and you
can select [On] or [Off] when developing the RAW images. (p.262)• You can also set [Distortion Correction] and [Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj] in [Lens
Correction] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu (p.88).

Setting the Image Finishing Tone

213

Setting Custom Image
You can set the image finishing tone before shooting when the capturemode is set to e (Program), K (Sensitivity Priority), b (Shutter Priority),c (Aperture Priority) or a (Manual).
Select from the following nine modes for the image finishing tone: Bright(default setting), Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, BleachBypass, Reversal Film and Monochrome. You can adjust the following
parameters for Image Tone.
Parameter

Settings

Setting Values

Sets the color saturation.
Saturation• Not available when [Reversal Film] or[Monochrome] is selected.

–4 to +4

Sets the color.
Hue–4 to +4

Changes the brightness of the image.
• Not available when [Reversal Film] isselected.

–4 to +4

Sets the image contrast.
Contrast• Not available when [Reversal Film] isselected.

–4 to +4

Sharpness

Sets the sharpness of the image outlines.
You can switch to [Fine Sharpness] whichmakes image outlines even thinner andsharper. Not available when the capturemode is set to C (Movie).

Filter EffectChanges the contrast to appear as if a B&W None/Green/Yellow/
Orange/Red/color filter was used. Set the filter color.
Magenta/Blue/Cyan/• Available only when [Monochrome] isInfrared Filter
selected.

ToningSets a color tone for [Bleach Bypass].
Sets the level for cold tone adjustment(- direction) and warm tone adjustment(+ direction) for [Monochrome].
• Available only when [Bleach Bypass] or[Monochrome] is selected.

–4 to +4

Bleach Bypass: Off/Green/Yellow/
Orange/Red/
Magenta/Purple/Blue/
Cyan
Monochrome: –4 to+4

6
Shooting Settings

High/Low Key
Adj• Not available when [Bleach Bypass],[Reversal Film] or [Monochrome] isselected.

214
When Cross Processing is set, the image finishing tone is fixed to [Bright] andthe parameters cannot be changed.

1

Press the M button in the status screen.
The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.

2

Use the four way controller (2345) to select [Custom
Image] and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a custom image appears.
After the power is turned on, the last image taken is displayed in the
background.

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select an image finishing tone.

Bright
R
Y

M

6

B

G
C

Shooting SettingsF

INFO
MENU Cancel

4

Check

Use the four-way controller (23)to choose a parameter you want
to change.

OK OK

Portrait
R
Y

M

B

G
C

F

INFO
MENU Cancel

5

Check

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (45) to change the setting.
The background image changes according to the settings.
You can visually check the saturation and hue with the radar chart.

Available operations

6

E-dialSwitches between [Sharpness] and [Fine Sharpness].
When set to [Fine Sharpness], image outlines can be
captured with more detail.

| button

Resets the set value. (Available only when [Green
Button] is assigned to the | button in [Green Button] of
the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu (p.197).)

mc button

Uses Digital Preview to preview the background image
with the setting applied.

M button

Saves the background image. Select [Save as] andpress the 4 button. (Not available during Live View.)

215

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.
You can also change the settings from the [A Rec. Mode 1] menu (p.87).

6
Shooting Settings

216

Setting Cross Processing
Cross processing is the procedure of deliberately processing a film in thewrong type of chemicals to create an image with different colors andcontrast. This camera features digital cross processing, which is doneinternally.
• Cross Processing is not available in the following situations.
- when the capture mode is set to Z (Night Scene HDR) of H (Scene)mode- when the file format is set to [RAW] or [RAW+] (fixed to [JPEG])• When Cross Processing is set, the following functions are not available.
- Multi-exposure- HDR Capture (The function selected last is used)- Changing the settings of White Balance and Custom Image
Set the mode dial to C (Movie) when using Cross Processing for movies.

6

1

Press the M button in the status screen.

Shooting Settings

The control panel appears.
Press the M button when the status screen is not displayed.
Set in [Movie] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu when the capture mode is
set to C (Movie). (p.165)

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select [Cross
Processing] and press the 4 button.
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select [Off], [Preset1-3], [Random] or [Favorite 1-3].

Cross Processing
OffOFF

MENU Cancel

4

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the control panel.

1

2

3

1

2

3

OK OK

217
You can also change the setting from the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu (p.87).

Saving the Cross Processing Setting of a Captured Image
The outcome of cross processing varies each time a picture is taken. If you
are able to take a cross processed image that you like, you can save the
Cross Processing settings used in that image. A total of 3 Cross
Processing settings can be saved for still pictures and movies.
To save Cross Processing setting for movies, set from [Movie] in the [A Rec.
Mode 3] menu with the mode dial set to C (Movie).

1

Select [Cross Processing] in the [A Rec. Mode 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Cross Processing] screen appears.

2

6

Cross Processing
Cross Processing
Save Settings

OFF

The camera will search for crossprocessed images starting from the most
MENU
recent image taken. (An hourglass icon isdisplayed while searching.) When a crossprocessed image is found, the screen to save the settings appears.
If there are no cross processed images, the message [No crossprocessed image] appears.

3

Use the e-dial to select a crossprocessed image.

100-0001

1

Saves this image's Cross
Processing settings
Save as Favorite 1
Save as Favorite 2
Save as Favorite 3
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Shooting Settings

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save Settings] andpress the four-way controller
(5).

218

4

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as
Favorite 1], [Save as Favorite 2] or [Save as Favorite 3] andpress the 4 button.
The settings for the selected image are saved to [Favorite 1 - 3].

5

6

Press the 3 button twice to finish saving.

Shooting Settings

7 Playback Functions
This chapter describes how to use the various playback
functions in Playback mode.

Playback Functions Operation ......................... 220
Setting the Playback Display Method .............. 222
Enlarging Images ............................................... 223
Displaying Multiple Images ............................... 224
Playing Back Images Continuously ................. 232
Rotating Images ................................................. 235
Deleting Multiple Images ................................... 236
Protecting Images from Deletion (Protect) ...... 240
Connecting the Camera to an AV Device ......... 242
Exchanging Image Data with Other Devices ... 244

220

Playback Functions Operation
Make settings related to playing back images in the playback mode paletteor [Q Playback] menu.
For details on how to use the menus, see “Using the Menus” (p.37).

Playback Mode Palette Setting Items
Press the four-way controller (3) inPlayback mode to display the playback
mode palette.
You can display the playback mode paletteeven when a movie is paused.

Image Rotation

7
Playback Functions

Rotates captured images.
Useful for image playback on
TV and other display devices
MENU Exit

Item

Function

OK OK

Page

s Image Rotation *1

Rotates images.

p.235

D Digital Filter *1

Changes the color tone of images, adds
softening and slimming effects, or adjusts
the brightness.

p.253

n Resize *1 *2

Changes the number of recorded pixels andquality level of the captured image andsaves it as a new file.

p.250

o Cropping *1

Cuts out only the desired area of the pictureand saves it as a new image.

p.251

Z ProtectProtects images from being accidentally erased. p.240

u Slideshow

Plays back the images one after another.

p.233

221
Item

Functionp Indexh

RAW Development *1

Page

Joins a number of images together andcreates a new image with them.

p.229

Converts RAW images to JPEG format.

p.259[ Movie Editing *3

Divides a movie and extracts segments from it. p.171

r DPOF *1 *2

Sets the DPOF settings.

g Image Comparison *1 Displays two images side-by-side.

p.285
p.228

i IrSimple

Sends or receives image data via infraredtransmission.

p.244

j Dueling Images

Images are squared off with those of otherW cameras in this dueling game.

p.246*1 This cannot be performed when a movie is displayed.
*2 This cannot be performed when a RAW image is displayed.
*3 This can be performed only when a movie is displayed.

Playback Menu Setting Items
You can perform the following settings in the[Q Playback ] menu.
Press the 3 button in Playback mode todisplay the [Q Playback 1] menu.

Q1

Item

Function

Page

Slideshow

Plays back the images one after another.
You can set how images will be displayedin the slideshow.

p.232

Quick Zoom

Sets the initial magnification whenenlarging images.

Bright/Dark Area

Sets whether or not to display the Bright/
Dark Area warning during playback.

Auto Image Rotation

Sets whether to rotate images shot with thecamera held vertically when playing back.

IrSimple

Sets infrared transmission settings and sends
or receives data via infrared transmission.

Delete All Images

You can delete all saved images at once. p.239

p.222

p.244

Playback Functions

Menu

7

Setting the Playback Display Method

222

You can set the initial magnification when enlarging images, whether todisplay the Bright/Dark Area warning, and whether to automatically rotate
images that are shot with the camera held vertically in Playback mode.

1
2

Select [Quick Zoom] in the [Q Playback 1] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the magnification andpress the 4 button.
Select from [Off] (default setting), [×2],[×4], [×8] or [×16].

1

Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
IrSimple
Delete All Images
MENU Cancel

3
7Playback Functions

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Bright/Dark Area], anduse the four-way controller (45)to select O or P.

Off
X2
X4
X8
X16
OK OK

1

Slideshow
Quick Zoom
Bright/Dark Area
Auto Image Rotation
IrSimple
Delete All Images

OffMENU Exit

4

5

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Auto Image
Rotation], and use the four-way controller (45) to selectO or P.
O

During playback, the image is automatically rotated based on therotation information when [18. Saving Rotation Info] in the [A Custom
Setting 3] menu (p.90) is set to [On]. (default setting)P

The image is not automatically rotated during playback.

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Enlarging Images

223

Images can be magnified up to 16 times in Playback mode.

1

Use the four-way controller (45)to select an image in Playbackmode.

100-0001

JPEG 1/ 2000 F5.6 ISO 200

2

Turn the e-dial to the right(toward y).
The image enlarges at each click (1.2
times to 16 times).

x2.4

7

Available operations
Moves the area to enlarge.

E-dial to the right (y)Enlarges the image (up to 16 times).

E-dial to the left (f)Reduces the image (up to 1.2 times*).

4 button

Returns to the original size.

M button

Switches information display On/Off.

* The default setting for the first click (minimum magnification) is 1.2 times. You canchange this in [Quick Zoom] of the [Q Playback 1] menu. (p.222)• You can enlarge the image by following the same procedure during InstantReview (p.71), Digital Preview (p.140) or Live View (p.163).
• The initial full display of vertical images is displayed with a magnification of
0.675 times that of horizontal images, therefore, magnification at the first click
starts at 1.0 times.

Playback Functions

Four-way controller (2345)

Displaying Multiple Images

224

Multi-image Display Screen
You can display 4, 9, 16, 36 or 81 thumbnail images on the monitor at thesame time. The default setting is nine image-display.

1

Turn the e-dial to the left (towardf) in Playback mode.

The multi-image display screen
appears.
Up to nine thumbnail images will be
displayed at once.

Selection frame

7
Playback Functions

INFO

100-0001
Scroll bar

225

Available operations
Four-way controller(2345)

Moves the selection frame

M button

Displays the [Multi-img Display Setting] screen. Use
the four-way controller (45) to select the number ofimages to display at the same time.

Multi-img Display Setting
Display TypeMENU Cancel INFO

OK OK

(Display Type cannot be selected when developing
multiple RAW images (p.260).)
K/i button2

Selects multiple images and deletes them. (p.236)

Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.
Icons such as C and ? are not displayed with thumbnail images for 81-image
display.

Images will be grouped and displayed by folder in which they are saved.

1

In the multi-image display
screen, turn the e-dial to the left
(toward f) again.
The folder display screen appears.

Playback Functions

Displaying Images by Folder

7

226

2

Select the folder you want todisplay.

100

101

12345
102

103

104

105

100_0105

Available operations

3

Four-way controller (2345)

Moves the selection frame.

K/i button

Deletes the selected folder and all
the images in it. (p.238)

Press the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen for the selected folder appears.

Displaying Images by Shooting Date (Calendar
Display)
7

Images will be grouped and displayed by the shooting date.

Playback Functions

1

In the multi-image display
screen, press the M button.
The [Multi-img Display Setting] screen
appears.

2

227
Press the M button again.
Multi-img Display Setting
Display TypeMENU Cancel INFOThe calendar display screen appears.
Only the dates when pictures were taken
are displayed.

OK OK

Number of images shot on this date2010. 9WED 22
FRI 24
MON 272010. 10THU
7SUN 10
WED 13
SAT 16

2/5

DeleteINFO

Shooting date Thumbnail

Available operations
Selects a shooting date.

Four-way controller (45)Selects an image taken on the selectedshooting date.

E-dial to the right (y)Displays the selected image. Turn to the left(f) to return to the calendar display.

M button

The camera returns to the multi-image
display screen.

K/i button

Deletes selected images.

Press the 4 button.
A full screen display of the selected image appears.

7
Playback Functions

3

Four-way controller (23)

228

Comparing Images
You can display two images side-by-side.

1

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select g (Image
Comparison) and press the 4 button.
The last image displayed will be displayed twice side-by-side.

3

Select two images you want tocompare using the e-dial andcompare them at left and right.

100-0001

MENU

100-0001

OK

Available operations

7
Playback Functions

4

4 button

Moves the selection frame to the right image, both
images, and left image each time the button is pressed.

Four-way controller(2345)

Moves the area to enlarge. When the selection
frame is placed on both images, you can manipulate
both images at the same time.

| button

Returns a position of the enlarged display area to thecenter.

E-dialWhen the selection frame is placed on the left or
right image, the previous or next image is displayed.
When the selection frames are placed on both
images, you can enlarge or reduce both images
simultaneously in the same magnification.

M button

Switches information display On/Off.

K/i button

When the selection frame is placed on the left or
right image, the selected image is deleted.

Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to the normal playback mode.

229

Joining Multiple Images (Index)
Join a number of images together and display them as an index print. You
can also save the displayed index print as a new image. You can selectthe images to include in the index print and have them randomly-arranged.

1

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select p (Index)
and press the 4 button.
The [Index] screen appears.

3
4

Press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select a layout and press the
4 button.

Index
LayoutImagesBackgrnd.
Selection

5
6

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Images] andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the number of images
and press the 4 button.
You can select 12, 24 or 36 images.
When the number of saved images issmaller than the number selected, empty
spaces will appear when [Layout] is set too and some images may be duplicatedfor other layouts.

Index
Layout12
ImagesBackgrnd. 24
Selection 36
Create an index image
MENU Cancel

OK OK

7
Playback Functions

You can select o (Thumbnail),p (Square), q (Random1),
Create an index imager (Random2), s (Random3) orp (Bubble).
OK OK
MENU Cancel
Images are displayed according to the filenumber (from the smallest number) for o, and are displayed in random
order for other layouts.

230

7
8

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Backgrnd.]
and press the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the background color
and press the 4 button.

Index
Layout12
ImagesBackgrnd.
Selection

You can select a white or black
background.

Create an index image
MENU Cancel

9

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Selection] andpress the four-way controller (5).

10 Use the four-way controller (23)to select a type of image
selection and press the 4
button.

Index
Layout12
ImagesBackgrnd.
Selection
Create an index image

7
Playback Functions

MENU Cancel

OK OK

u All images

Picks images automatically from all of the images
saved.

w Manual

Individually select images you want to include in theindex. Continue by selecting [Select image(s)] andselect the individual images.

x Folder name

Picks images automatically from the folder
selected. Continue by selecting [Select a folder] andselect the folder.

11 Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Create an index image]and press the 4 button.

Index
Layout12
ImagesBackgrnd.
Selection

The index image is created and aconfirmation screen appears.

Create an index image
MENU

OK OK

231

12 Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save] or [Reshuffle]and press the 4 button.

Save
Reshuffle
Cancel
MENU

OK OK

Save

The index image is saved as a P and C file.

Reshuffle

Reselects the images to be included in the index anddisplays a new index image. However, if [Thumbnail] isselected for [Layout], this item is not displayed.

After the index image is saved, the camera returns to Playback modeand the index image is displayed.
Processing may take a while when creating an index image.

7
Playback Functions

Playing Back Images Continuously

232

You can play back all images saved on your SD Memory Card
successively in the slideshow.

Setting the Slideshow Display
Sets how images will be displayed during the Slideshow.

1

Select [Slideshow] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The screen to make the slideshow settings appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (23)to select an item you want tochange.
The following items can be changed.

7

Slideshow starts
Start
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback

3sec.

Playback Functions

MENU

Item

Description

OK OK

Setting

Interval

3sec. (default setting)/
Select an image display interval.
5sec./10sec./30sec.

ScreenEffectSelect a transition effect when
the next image is displayed.

RepeatPlayback

Set whether to start theslideshow again from theP (default setting)/O
beginning after the last image isdisplayed.

Off (default setting)/Fade/
Wipe/Stripe

3

233
Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to change the setting andpress the 4 button.

Start
Interval
Screen Effect
Repeat Playback
MENU Cancel

3sec.
5sec.
10sec.
30sec.
OK OK

Starting the Slideshow

1

Select [Start] in Step 2 on p.232 and press the 4 button.
Or, select u (Slideshow) in the playback mode paletteand press the 4 button.
The start screen is displayed and theslideshow begins.

Start

OK

7

4 button

Pauses playback. Press again to resume
playback.

Four-way controller (4)Shows the previous image.

Four-way controller (5)Shows the next image.

Four-way controller (3)Stops playback.

Playback Functions

Available operations

234

2

Stop the slideshow.
Slideshow ends when one of the following operations is performed
during playback or pause.
- the four-way controller (3) is pressed *1- the Q button is pressed *1- the 3 button is pressed *1- the shutter release button is pressed halfway or fully *2- the mode dial is turned *2- the =/L button is pressed *2*1 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to normal Playback mode.
*2 After slideshow ends, the camera switches to Capture mode.

For movies, only the first frame is displayed and then the next image isdisplayed after the set interval has elapsed. To play a movie during aslideshow, press the 4 button while the first frame is displayed. After themovie has finished playing, the slideshow will resume.

7
Playback Functions

Rotating Images

235

You can rotate an image counterclockwise in 90° increments at a time andsave the rotated image. The image rotation information is saved with theimage and during playback it will be displayed in portrait orientation.
• When [18. Saving Rotation Info] in the [A Custom Setting 3] menu (p.90) is
set to [Off], the image rotation information is not saved when shooting.
• When [Auto Image Rotation] (p.222) in the [Q Playback 1] menu is set toO (On), the image with rotation information is automatically rotated during
playback.
You cannot change the image rotation information in the following conditions.
- when the image is protected- when the image rotation information is not saved with the image- when [Auto Image Rotation] (p.222) in the [Q Playback 1] menu is set to
P (Off)1
2

Select the image you want to rotate in Playback mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).

7

The playback mode palette appears.

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select s (Image
Rotation) and press the 4 button.
The selected image is rotated in 90° increments and the four thumbnail
images are displayed.

4

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select a desired
rotation direction and press the
4 button.
The image rotation information is saved.
MENU Cancel

OK OK

Playback Functions

3

Deleting Multiple Images

236

Deleting Selected Images
You can delete multiple images in the multi-image display at once.
Deleted images cannot be restored.

• Protected images cannot be deleted.
• You can select up to 100 images at a time.

1

Turn the e-dial to the left (towardf) in Playback mode.
The multi-image display screen appears.

7
Playback Functions

2

Press the K/i button.
The screen to select the images to delete
is displayed.
The screen temporarily changes to 36image display when [Multi-img Display
Setting] (p.224) is set to 81-image
display.

INFO

100-0001

3

237
Select the images to delete.

MENU

DeleteOK

Available operations

4

Four-way controller(2345)

Moves the selection frame

4 button

Adds O and selects an image. Press again to returnto P. Protected images (Z) cannot be selected.

E-dialDisplays a full screen display of the image selectedwith the selection frame. When the image isdisplayed full screen, press the four-way controller(45) to display the previous or next image.

Press the K/i button.
The delete confirmation screen appears.

5

7
All selected images will
be deleted
Select & Delete
CancelMENU

6

Press the 4 button.
The selected images are deleted.

OK OK

Playback Functions

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Select & Delete].

238

Deleting a Folder
You can delete a selected folder and all the images in it.

1Turn the e-dial two clicks to theleft (toward f) in Playbackmode.
The folder display screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select a folder todelete and press the K/ibutton.
The delete folder confirmation screen
appears.

100

101

12345
102

103

104

105

100_0105

7
Playback Functions

3

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Delete].

100 _ 0105
All images in selected
folder will be deleted
DeleteCancel
OK OK

4Press the 4 button.
The selected folder and all images in it are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the four3image(s)way controller (23) to select [Delete All]
Protected images are foundor [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
Delete All
images are also deleted.
Leave All
OK OK

239

Deleting All Images
You can delete all saved images at once.
Deleted images cannot be restored.

1

Select [Delete All Images] in the [Q Playback 1] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The confirmation screen for deleting all images is displayed.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Delete All Images].
All images will be deleted
from memory
Delete All Images
Cancel
OK OK

3Press the 4 button.

7

3image(s)Protected images are found
Delete All
Leave All
OK OK

Playback Functions

All images are deleted.
The confirmation screen appears when
there are protected images. Use the fourway controller (23) to select [Delete All]or [Leave All] and press the 4 button.
When [Delete All] is selected, protected
images are also deleted.

Protecting Images from Deletion(Protect)240

You can protect images from being accidentally deleted.
Even protected images are deleted if the inserted SD Memory Card isformatted.

Protecting a Single Image

1

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to selectZ (Protect) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the protection setting method is displayed.

3
7

Use the four-way controller(23) to select [Single Image]and press the 4 button.

Playback Functions

Single ImageAll Images

MENU

4
5

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (45) to select an image toprotect.
Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Protect].

100-0105

Select [Unprotect] to cancel theprotection of the image.
Protect
Unprotect
MENU

OK OK

6

241
Press the 4 button.
The image is protected and the Y icon appears at the top right of thescreen.
Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to protect other images.

7

Press the 3 button.
The camera returns to Playback mode.

Protecting All Images

1
2

Select [All Images] in Step 3 on p.240 and press the 4
button.
Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Protect] and press the
4 button.

Protect
Unprotect
MENU

7
OK OK

Playback Functions

All images saved on the SD Memory Card
are protected.
Select [Unprotect] to cancel theprotection of all images.

Protects all images

Connecting the Camera to an AV
Device242

You can connect the camera to a TV or other device with a video input
terminal and play back images. Use the optional AV cable I-AVC7.

1
2

7
Playback Functions

3
4

Turn the AV device and camera off.
Open the terminal cover, face the arrow on the AV cabletoward the 2 mark on the camera, and connect the cableto the PC/AV terminal.

Connect the other end of the AV cable to the video input
terminal on the AV device.
Turn the AV device and camera on.
The camera turns on in video mode, and the camera information isdisplayed on the screen of the connected AV device.
• If you intend to use the camera continuously for a long period, use of the AC
adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) is recommended. (p.50)• For an AV device with multiple video input terminals, check the operating
manual of the AV device, and select a suitable video input terminal forconnecting the camera.
• You cannot adjust the volume on the camera while the camera is connectedto the AV device. Adjust the volume on the AV device.

243
Selecting the Video Output Format
When the hometown is set at the time of initial setting (p.60), the video
output format is set in accordance with that region. Depending on the
country or region, images may fail to be played back with the set video
output format. If this happens, change the video output format setting.

1
2

3

Select [Video Out] in the [R Set-up 2] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [NTSC] or [PAL] andpress the 4 button.

1 2 3 4Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
MENU Cancel

±0
NTSC
PAL
MSC
Date

OK OK

Press the 3 button.
The video output format is set.

7
Playback Functions

The video output format differs depending on the region. When you set [Setting
the Time] in the World Time setting (p.270) to X (Destination), the video output
setting changes to the video output format for that city.

Exchanging Image Data with Other
Devices244This camera features infrared transmission (IrSimple/IrSS) which allows
you to send image data to cell phones and printers, as well as play adueling game with other W cameras.

Sending and Receiving Image Data via
Infrared Transmission
Send and receive image data to and from other W cameras and otherdevices that support infrared transmission, such as cell phones.
• Do not block the infrared port during infrared transmission.
• Infrared transmission may not operate properly if the infrared port is dirty.
When necessary, clean the port with a soft dry cloth.
• Data may not be properly transmitted under direct sunlight, directly under afluorescent light, or near infrared devices.
Only JPEG files can be sent or received.

7
Playback Functions

1
2

To send an image via infrared transmission, first select theimage in Playback mode.
Select [IrSimple] in the [Q Playback 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [IrSimple] screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Automatic
Resizing] and press the four-way controller (5).

4245
Use the four-way controller (23)to select the number of recorded
pixels and press the 4 button.

IrSimple
Send and receive
Automatic Resizing
2M
Transmission Method 0.3M

OFF

MENU Cancel

OK OK

i

When the number of pixels is larger than i, the image is resized
to i or less. (default setting)Z

When the number of pixels is larger than Z, the image is resized
to Z or less.

OFF The image is not resized.

5Standard (IrSimple)

Bi-directionally exchanges information with the otherdevice. (default setting)

IrSS

Transmits information in only one direction and does not accept
any answers or requests for resending from the other device.
Select this setting when specified by the other device.

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Send andreceive] and press the 4 button.
The screen to select either to send or receive data appears.

7

Bring the infrared ports of your camera and the otherdevice close together.
Operate infrared transmission on the other device.
Transmission is possible is within a distance of 20 cm, at an emission
angle of up to 15 degrees from the center.

20 cm

15°

7
Playback Functions

6

Change the [Transmission Method] setting as necessary.

246

8

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Send] or [Receive] andpress the 4 button.

100-0001
IrSimple[Sending] or [Receiving] appears and theSenddata is transmitted.
Receive
Do not move the camera until data
INFO Setting
MENU Exit
transmission is complete.
When data transmission is successful,[Send complete] or [Receive complete] appears.

OK OK

You can transmit data from i (IrSimple) in the playback mode palette if thesettings for [Automatic Resizing] and [Transmission Method] are not changed.

Playing a Dueling Game using Your Images(Dueling Images)
You can play a game with other W cameras using infrared transmission.
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be used for Dueling
Images.
• Dueling Images uses the IrDA method of infrared transmission regardless ofthe [IrSimple] setting in the [Q Playback 1] menu.

7
Playback Functions

1

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select j(Dueling Images) and press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to choose an image to use.

Select image

100-0001

Accept challenge
Issue challenge
Game Score
MENU

OK OK

4

247
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Accept
challenge] or [Issue challenge] and press the 4 button.
When your opponent selects [Accept challenge], select [Issue
challenge].
[Communication in progress] appears and the data is transmitted.
If the data is transmitted properly, your opponent’s image appears in theright side of the [Prepare Your Image] screen.

5

Use the four-way controller (23)to select the order of parameters
to use.
Fighting strength is calculated based on
the shooting conditions.

Prepare Your Image

VS

YOU

1
2
3

RIVAL

?
?
?
Start

MENU

6

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Start] and press the 4
button.

Prepare Your Image

VS

YOU

1
2
3

Press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the single image
display.

7

Start
MENU

7

RIVAL

?
?
?
OK OK

And the winner is. . .

YOU

RIVAL

WinnerOK Exit

Playback Functions

After [Communication in progress]
appears, the duel starts.
When the duel is over, the result appears.

OK OK

248
• The image sent from the opponent is not saved.
• If you select [Game Score] in Step 3, you
can check the number of duels that you
Game Score
have won and lost, and those that ended
in a draw. Press the | button in thisWin
10screen to reset the game score.
Lose
200• If data transmission is not completed
properly or it is interrupted, the message
Draw
1[Unable to establish data communication]
appears.
OK
Reset

7

OK

Playback Functions

8 Processing Images
This chapter describes how to process pictures taken andedit RAW images.

Changing the Image Size ................................... 250
Processing Images with Digital Filters ............ 253
Developing RAW Images ................................... 259

Changing the Image Size250

Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the image, andsaves the image as a new file.

Changing the Number of Recorded Pixels andQuality Level (Resize)
Changes the number of recorded pixels and quality level of the selected
image and saves it as a new image. The number of recorded pixels can be
reduced while still obtaining an image with good quality.
• Only JPEG files captured with this camera can be resized.
• You cannot select a larger resolution than that of the original image.
• Images already resized to Z with this camera cannot be resized.

1
2

Select an image to resize in Playback mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

8

3

Processing Images

Use the four-way controller (2345) to selectn (Resize) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select the recorded pixels and quality level appears.

4

Use the four-way controller (45)to select the desired image size.
You can select one of the image sizes
starting from one size smaller than that of
the original image. The selectable sizes
vary according to the original image size
and aspect ratio.

5

12M
MENU

10M
OK

Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to select the quality level.
You can select C, D or E.

6

251
Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.

Saves the image as a new file

The resized image is saved as a newimage.

Save asCancelMENU

OK OK

Cutting Out Part of the Image (Cropping)Cuts out only the desired area of the selected image and saves it as a newimage. The aspect ratio can also be changed.
• Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be cropped.
• Images already resized to S or Z with this camera cannot be cropped.

3

Select an image to crop in Playback mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).

8The playback mode palette appears.

Processing Images

1
2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to selecto (Cropping) and press the 4 button.
The cropping frame to specify the size and position of the area to crop
appears on the screen.

252

4

Specify the size and position of
the area to crop by using
cropping frame.

MENU

OK

INFO

3:2

Available operations
E-dialChanges the size of the cropping frame.

Four-way controller(2345)

Moves the cropping frame.

M button

Changes the aspect ratio. Select from [3:2],[4:3], [16:9] or [1:1]. The image can also be
rotated from -45° to +45° in increments of 1°.

Aspect Ratio
Image Rotation

3:2
±0°

MENU

| button8
Processing Images

5

Rotates the cropping frame in 90° increments.
| appears only when the cropping frame canbe rotated.

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

6

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.

Saves the image as a new file

The cropped image is saved as a newimage.

Save asCancelMENU

OK OK

Processing Images with Digital
Filters253

You can edit captured images using digital filters.
The following filters are available.
Filter name

EffectParameter

Toy Camera

Creates an image that Shading Level: +1 to +3
looks as though it was Blur: +1 to +3
shot with a toy camera. Tone Break: Red/Green/Blue/Yellow

Retro

Creates an image with Toning (B-A): 7 levels
the look of an old photo. Frame Composite: None/Thin/Medium/ThickHigh Contrast

Enhances the+1 to +5
contrast in the image.

Sketch Filter

Creates an image that Contrast: Low/Medium/High
looks as though it was
Scratch Effect: OFF/ON
drawn with a pencil.

Water Color

Creates an image
that looks as though
it was painted.

PastelCreates an image thatlooks as though it was Weak/Standard/Strong
drawn with a crayon.

Posterization

Lessens the tone of theimage to create an image+1 to +5that looks as though it
was hand-drawn.

Intensity: +1 to +3
Saturation: OFF/Low/Medium/High

Miniature

Width: Narrow/Middle/Wide
Blurs part of theimage to create aAngle: Side/Vertical/Positive Slope/
fake miniature scene. Negative Slope
Blur: +1 to +3
Brightness: -8 to +8

Base
Parameter
Adj

Saturation: -3 to +3
Adjusts theparameters to create Hue: -3 to +3
the desired image.
Contrast: -3 to +3

Monochrome

Creates a monochrome Filter Effect: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Infrared Filter
image such as a blackToning (B-A): 7 levels
and-white photo.

Sharpness: -3 to +3

Processing Images

In-Focus Plane: -3 to +38

254
Filter name
Color

Extract Color

EffectParameter

Adds a color filter tothe image. Selectfrom 18 filters (6colors × 3 tones).

Color: Red/Magenta/Blue/Cyan/Green/Yellow
Color Density: Light/Standard/Dark

Extracted Color 1: Red/Magenta/Blue/
Cyan/Green/Yellow
Extracts two specificcolors and makes the Extractable Range of Color 1: -2 to +2
rest of the image
Extracted Color 2: Red/Magenta/Blue/
black and white.
Cyan/Green/Yellow/OFF
Extractable Range of Color 2: -2 to +2

8

Soft

Creates an image
Soft Focus: +1 to +3
with a soft focus
throughout the image. Shadow Blur: OFF/ON

Starburst

For taking pictures ofnight scenes or lights
reflected on waterwith a special
sparkling look byadding extra glitter tothe highlights.

Shape: Cross/Star/Snow Crystal/Heart/Musical Note
Effect Density: Small/Medium/Large
Size: Small/Medium/Large
Angle: 0°/30°/45°/60°

Processing Images

Fish-eyeCreates an image thatlooks as though it was Weak/Medium/Strong
shot with a fish-eye lens.

Slim

Changes thehorizontal and vertical -8 to +8
ratio of images.

HDR

Creates an image thatlooks like a highWeak/Medium/Strong
dynamic range image.
High Contrast: OFF/+1 to +5
Soft Focus: OFF/+1 to +3
Tone Break: OFF/Red/Green/Blue/Yellow

Custom Filter

Customize and savea filter to your own
preferences.

Shading Type: 6 types
Shading Level: -3 to +3
Distortion Type: 3 types
Distortion Level: OFF/Weak/Medium/Strong
Invert Color: OFF/ON

255
Only JPEG and RAW files captured with this camera can be edited using theDigital Filter.

Applying the Digital Filter

1
2

Select an image for applying the digital filter in Playback
mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select D (Digital
Filter) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a filter appears.

4

Use the four-way controller(2345) to select a filter andpress the 4 button.

100-0001
Toy Camera

After selecting a filter, you can check theeffect on the screen.
You can select a different image byturning the e-dial.

OK OK

Use the four-way controller (23) to select a parameterand the four-way controller (45) to adjust the value.
100-0001
Red

100-0001
Slim

MENU

OK

Color Filter

MENU

OK

Slim Filter

8
Processing Images

5

MENU Exit

256

6

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Use filters incombination] or [Save as].
Select [Use filters in combination] when
you want to apply additional filters to thesame image.

Continue selecting filters?

Use filters in combination
Save asCancel
MENU

8

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
If [Use filters in combination] was selected, the camera returns to Step 4.
If [Save as] was selected, the filter-processed image is saved as a newimage.
Up to 20 filters, including a digital filter used during shooting (p.155), can be
combined to the same image.

Recreating Filter Effects
8
Processing Images

Retrieves the setting of an image with filter effects and apply the same
filter effects to other images.

1
2

Select a filter-processed image in Playback mode.
Select D (Digital Filter) in the playback mode palette.

3257
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Recreating filter
effects] and press the 4
button.
The history of the filter set for the selected
image appears.

Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
Searching for the original image
MENU

4

To check the parameter details,
press the M button.

100-0001
Reapplies following digital filter
effects from previous image

You can check the filter parameters.
1.
2.
3.
4.

5.
6.
7.
8.

MENU

5

OK OK

9.
13.
10.
14.
11.
15.
12.
16.
INFO Details

17. - 18. - 19. - 20. - OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The image selection screen appears.

6

Use the four-way controller (45)to select an image for applying
the same filter effects and press
the 4 button.

7

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.

8

MENU

OK OK

Saves the image as a new file

The filter-processed image is saved as a
new image.

Save asCancelMENU

OK OK

Processing Images

You can only select an image that has notbeen processed with a filter.
The save confirmation screen appears.

100-0001
Performs digital filter
processing to this image

258

Searching for the Original Image
Searches for and displays the original image prior to digital filter
application.

1

Select [Searching for the original
image] in Step 3 on p.257 andpress the 4 button.
The original image prior to digital filter
application is retrieved.

Applying the digital filter
Recreating filter effects
Searching for the original image
MENU

OK OK

If the original image is no longer stored on the SD Memory Card, the message[Original image, prior to digital filter application, is not found] appears.

8
Processing Images

Developing RAW Images

259

You can convert captured RAW files into JPEG files.
Only RAW files captured with this camera can be edited. RAW files and JPEG
files captured with other cameras cannot be edited on this camera.

Developing One RAW Image

1
2

Select a RAW image in Playback mode.
Press the four-way controller (3).
The playback mode palette appears.

3

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select h (RAW
Development) and press the 4 button.
The screen to select a development method is displayed.

4

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Developing a Single
Image] and press the 4 button.

Developing a Single ImageMENU

The parameters recorded in the image fileappear.
You can select a different image byturning the e-dial.
To specify the parameters before
developing, refer to “Specifying theParameters” (p.262).

RAW

OK OK

JPEG

12M

File Format
ISO

NR

MENU

OK

sRGB
100-0001

Processing Images

Developing Multiple Images

8

260

5

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

6

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.

RAW

JPEG

Saves the image as a new file

The RAW image is developed and saved
as a new image.

Save asCancelMENU

7

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Continue] or [Exit].
Select [Continue] to edit other images.

OK OK

Image developed and stored.
Continue developing?

Continue
Exit
OK OK

8

Press the 4 button.
If you select [Continue] in Step 7, the screen for selecting the parameterin Step 4 appears again.

8
Processing Images

Developing Multiple RAW Images
You can develop multiple RAW images with the same settings.

1

Select [Developing Multiple Images] in Step 4 on p.259 andpress the 4 button.
The multi-image display screen appears.
Refer to p.224 for details on operations in the multi-image display screen.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select the RAW
images to be developed and press the 4 button.

3

261
Press the M button.
The development confirmation screen
appears.

4

5

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Develop images asshot] or [Develop images withmodified settings].

Develop images as shot
Develop images withmodified settings

To change parameters, select [Develop
images with modified settings]. For
details, refer to “Specifying theParameters” (p.262).
The screen to select a parameter appears.

MENU

Use the four-way controller(2345) to set [Recorded
Pixels] and [Quality Level].

Recorded Pixels

RAW

OK OK

JPEG

12M

8

6

OK

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

7

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Save as] and press the
4 button.

RAW

JPEG

Selected images are saved
as new files

The selected RAW images are developedand saved as new images.

Save asCancelMENU

OK OK

Processing Images

MENU

262

Specifying the Parameters
Specify the parameters for developing RAW images.
The following parameters can be changed.
Parameter

8

Value

Page

Recorded Pixels

E (4288×2848)/J (3936×2624)/
P (3072×2048)/i (1728×1152)

p.192

Quality Level

C (Best) / D (Better) / E (Good)

p.193

Custom Image

Bright/Natural/Portrait/Landscape/Vibrant/
Muted/Bleach Bypass/Reversal Film/
Monochromep.213

White Balance *1

F (Auto)/G (Daylight)/H (Shade)/^ (Cloudy)/JD (Fluorescent Light Daylight
Color)/JN (Fluorescent Light Daylight
White)/JW (Fluorescent Light Cool White)/
JL (Fluorescent Light Warm White)/
I (Tungsten Light)/L (Flash)/f/
K (Manual)p.200

Sensitivity-2.0 to +2.0–

Processing Images

High-ISO NR

Auto/Off/Low/Medium/High

p.100

Shadow Correction

Off/Low/Medium/High

p.208

Distortion Correction *2

Off/Onp.211

Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj *2

Off/Onp.211

Color Space

sRGB/AdobeRGB

p.205*1 This cannot be set for RAW files taken in Multi-exposure mode.
*2 This can be selected only when a compatible lens is attached. (p.211)

1

Press the four-way controller(23) in Step 4 on p.259 tochoose the parameter you want
to change.

RAW

JPEG

12M

File Format
ISO

NR

MENU

OK

sRGB
100-0001

2

263
Use the four-way controller (45) to change the value.
Use the four-way controller (5) to display the setting screen for White
Balance and Custom Image.

3

Press the 4 button.
The save confirmation screen appears.

4

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Save as] andpress the 4 button.
The RAW image is developed and saved as a new image.
• You cannot save the background image and use Digital Preview with White
Balance and Custom Image.
• When the white balance is set to K (Manual), press the mc button todisplay the measuring screen.

8
Processing Images

264

Memo

9 Changing Additional
Settings

This chapter describes how to change additional settings.

How to Operate the Set-up Menu ...................... 266
Formatting an SD Memory Card ....................... 268
Setting the Beep, Date and Time, and Display
Language ............................................................ 269
Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu Display .. 274
Setting the Folder/File Number ......................... 279
Selecting the Power Settings ............................ 281
Setting the Photographer Information ............. 283
Setting the DPOF Settings ................................ 285
Correcting Defective Pixels in the CMOS
Sensor (Pixel Mapping) ..................................... 287
Selecting Settings to Save in the Camera(Memory) ............................................................. 288

266

How to Operate the Set-up Menu
Perform general settings related to the camera in the [R Set-up] menu.
For details on how to use the menus, refer to “Using the Menus” (p.37).

Set-up Menu Setting Items
Perform the following settings in the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Press the 3 button in Capture/Playback mode and use the four-way
controller (45) or e-dial to display the [R Set-up 1-4] menus.
Menu

R1

9

Item

Function

Page

Changing Additional Settings

Language/uChanges the language in which menus andp.273
messages appear.

Date Adjustment

Sets the date format and time.

p.270

World Time

Sets the display of the local date and timeof the specified city so they can bedisplayed on the monitor in addition to thepresent location when traveling overseas.

p.270

Text Size

Sets the text size of an item selected on thep.274
respective menu screens.

Beep

Switches the beep tone on/off and changes
p.269
its volume.

Guide Display

Sets whether to display indicators on themonitor.

p.274

Status Screen

Sets the display color of the status screen
and control panel.

p.276

Brightness Level

Changes the brightness of the monitor.

p.277

LCD Color Tuning

Adjusts the color of the monitor.

p.278

Video Out

Sets the output format when connecting top.243
an AV device with a video input terminal.

USB Connection

Sets the USB connection mode whenconnecting to a computer.

p.293

Folder Name

Sets the naming system of the folder forstoring images.

p.279

R2

267
Menu
R2

R3

R4

Item

Function

Page

Create New Folder

Creates a new folder on the SD Memory
Card.

p.279

Copyright
Information

Sets the photographer and copyrightinformation embedded in Exif.

p.283

Auto Power Off

Sets the time until the camera turns off
automatically.

p.281

AA Battery Type

Selects the type of AA batteries used forthe camera.

p.282

Reset

Resets all settings.

p.310

Pixel Mapping

Maps out and corrects any defective pixels
p.287
in the CMOS sensor.

Dust Alert

Detects dust adhering to the CMOS
sensor.

p.316

Dust Removal

Cleans the CMOS sensor by shaking it.

p.315

Sensor Cleaning

Locks the mirror in the up position forcleaning the CMOS sensor with a blower.

p.318

FormatFormats an SD Memory Card.

p.268[R Set-up 1] menu

[R Set-up 2] menu

1 2 3 41 2 3 4

EnglishStandard
3sec.

[R Set-up 3] menu

MENU Exit

1 2 3 4

1min.
AUTO

NTSC
MSC
Date

[R Set-up 4] menu

1 2 3 4

Auto Power Off
AA Battery Type
Reset

±0

Pixel Mapping
Dust Alert
Dust Removal
Sensor Cleaning
FormatMENU Exit

9
Changing Additional Settings

Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
MENU Exit

Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
MENU ExitFormatting an SD Memory Card

268

Use this camera to format (initialize) an SD Memory Card that is unusedor has been used on other cameras or digital devices.
Formatting deletes all the data saved on the SD Memory Card.
• Do not remove the SD Memory Card while formatting. The card may bedamaged and become unusable.
• Formatting deletes all data, either protected or unprotected. Be aware.

1

Select [Format] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
The [Format] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Format].

FormatAll data will be deleted

FormatCancel
OK OK

3
9Press the 4 button.

Changing Additional Settings

Formatting starts.
When formatting is completed, the screenthat was displayed before selecting themenu appears again.

Formatting

When an SD Memory Card is formatted, the volume label assigned to the card
is “K-r”. When the W is connected to a computer, the SD Memory Card isrecognized as a removable disk with the name “K-r”. (p.294)

Setting the Beep, Date and Time, andDisplay Language

269

Setting the Beep
You can turn the camera operation beep on or off, or change its volume.
By default, all available items are set to O (On), and the volume level is
set to [3]. The following six items can be set.
• In-focus• AE-L (AE Lock operation sound)• Self-timer• Remote Control• One Push File Format (operation sound when [One Push File Format]
is assigned to the | button)• Press OK for 1 sec. (operation sound when changing AF point isenabled or disabled)

1

Select [Beep] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press the fourway controller (5).
The [Beep 1] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (3) and use the four-way
controller (45) to adjust the volume.
Select from six levels. When set to 0, you can turn all the beeps off.

3

Turn the e-dial to display the [Beep 2]
screen.

Beep

1 2

VolumeIn-focus
AE-L
Self-timer
Remote Control
One Push File Format
MENU

4
5

Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or
P (Off).
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Use the four-way controller (23)to select an item.

270

Changing the Date and Time Display
You can change the initial date and time settings, and set their display
formats. Choose [mm/dd/yy], [dd/mm/yy] or [yy/mm/dd] for the datedisplay format, and [12h] (12-hour display) or [24h] (24-hour display) for
the time display format.
Set in [Date Adjustment] of the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.266).
1 Setting the Date and Time (p.64)

Date Adjustment
Date Format

mm / dd / yy 24h

Date

01 / 01 / 2010

Time

00 : 00
Settings complete

MENU Cancel

Setting the World Time
The date and time selected in “Initial Settings” (p.60) serve as the date andtime of your present location.
Setting the destination in [World Time] enables you to display the local
date and time on the monitor when traveling overseas.

1
9

Select [World Time] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [World Time] screen appears.

Changing Additional Settings

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select X (Destination) or W
(Hometown) for [Setting theTime].
This setting is reflected on the date andtime that appear in the guide display andcontrol panel.

3

World Time
Setting the Time
Destination
London16 : 00

Hometown
New York

10 : 00

MENU

Press the four-way controller (3).
The selection frame moves to X (Destination setting).

4

271
Press the four-way controller (5).
The [X Destination] screen appears.

5

Use the four-way controller (45)to select a destination city.
Turn the e-dial to change the region.
The location, time difference and current
time of the selected city appear.

Destination

LondonDSTMENU Cancel

6
7+06:00
16:00
OK OK

Press the four-way controller (3) to select [DST].
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O (On) or
P (Off).
Select O if the destination city uses daylight saving time (DST).

8

Press the 4 button.
The destination setting is saved and the camera returns to the [WorldTime] screen.

9

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings• Refer to “List of World Time Cities” (p.272) for cities that can be selected asa destination.
• Select W (Hometown) in Step 2 to set the city and DST setting.
• X appears in the guide display and control panel if [Setting the Time] is set
to X (Destination). (p.24)• When you switch [Setting the Time] to X (Destination), the video output(p.243) setting changes to the video output format for that city.

272
List of World Time Cities
RegionNorth
America

Central andSouthAmerica

Europe9
Changing Additional Settings

City
Honolulu
Anchorage
Vancouver
San Francisco
Los Angeles
Calgary
Denver
Chicago
Miami
Toronto
New York
Halifax
Mexico City
Lima
Santiago
CaracasBuenos Aires
Sao Paulo
Rio de Janeiro
LisbonMadridLondonParis
Amsterdam
Milan
Rome
Copenhagen
BerlinPragueStockholm
Budapest
Warsaw
AthensHelsinki
Moscow

RegionAfrica/West Asia

East Asia

City
Dakar
Algiers
Johannesburg
Istanbul
Cairo
Jerusalem
Nairobi
JeddahTehranDubai
Karachi
Kabul
Male
Delhi
Colombo
Kathmandu
Dacca
YangonBangkok
Kuala Lumpur
Vientiane
Singapore
Phnom Penh
Ho chi Minh
JakartaHong Kong
BeijingShanghai
ManilaTaipei
Seoul
Tokyo
Guam

273
RegionOceaniaCity
PerthAdelaide
SydneyNoumeaWellington
Auckland
Pago Pago

Setting the Display Language
You can change the language in which the menus, error messages, etc.
are displayed.
The camera supports the following languages: English, French, German,
Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch, Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish,
Czech, Hungarian, Turkish, Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese,
Simplified Chinese and Japanese.
Set in [Language/u] of the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.266).
1 Setting the Display Language (p.60)

MENU Cancel

OK OK

9
Changing Additional Settings

274

Adjusting the Monitor and the Menu
Display
Setting the Text Size
You can set the text size of an item selected on the respective menu
screens to [Standard] (normal display) or [Large] (magnified display).
Set in [Text Size] of the [R Set-up 1] menu
(p.266).

1 2 3 4

EnglishDate Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
MENU Cancel

Standard
Large
3sec.
OK OK

Setting the Guide Display Time
Set the length of time that the guides are displayed on the monitor when
the camera is turned on or the Capture mode is changed. (p.24)
Select from [3 sec.] (default setting), [10 sec.], [30 sec.] and [Off].
Set in [Guide Display] of the [R Set-up 1]
menu (p.266).
9

1 2 3 4

EnglishChanging Additional Settings

Date Adjustment
World Time
Text Size
Beep
Guide Display
Status Screen
MENU Cancel

3sec.
10sec.
30sec.
Off
OK OK

275

Setting the Initial Menu Tab Displayed
Set the initial menu tab displayed on the monitor when the 3 button
is pressed.

1

Select [19. Save Menu Location] in the [A Custom Setting
3] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [19. Save Menu Location] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Reset Menu Location]
or [Save Menu Location] andpress the 4 button.

19. Save Menu Location
1 Reset Menu Location
2 Save Menu Location

Pressing the menu button
accesses the last usedmenu tab
OK OK
MENU Cancel

3

1

Reset Menu Location

The [A Rec. Mode 1] menu ([Q Playback1] menu in Playback mode) is always
displayed first. (default setting)2

Save Menu Location

The menu tab last selected is displayed first.

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9
Changing Additional Settings

276

Setting the Status Screen Display
You can set the display color of the status screen and control panel.

1

Select [Status Screen] in the [R Set-up 1] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Status Screen] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to select from six display colors.

Status Screen
Display Color1

1/ 125

F 5.6
MENU

3

Press the 3 button twice.
The display color of the status screen and control panel are changed.

Setting the Display for Instant Review
You can set the Instant Review display settings.
91

Changing Additional Settings

Select [Instant Review] in the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Instant Review] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (5)and use the four-way controller(23) to select a display time.

Instant Review
1sec.
Display Time
3sec.
Histogram
5sec.
Bright/Dark Area
Enlarge Instant Review Off

MENU Cancel

OK OK

3
4
5

277
Press the 4 button.
Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Histogram],[Bright/Dark Area] or [Enlarge Instant Review].
Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
When [Enlarge Instant Review] is set to O (default setting), you canmagnify the image with the e-dial. (p.223)

6

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Adjusting the Brightness of the Monitor
You can adjust the brightness of the monitor. Adjust the settings when themonitor is hard to see.

1

Select [Brightness Level] in the [R Set-up 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Brightness Level] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (45)to adjust the brightness.

Brightness Level

±0

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Changing Additional Settings

MENU Cancel

3
4

9

+2

You can select from 15 brightness levels.
The value is reset to ±0 when the |button is pressed.

278

Adjusting the Color of the Monitor
You can adjust the color of the monitor.

1

Select [LCD Color Tuning] in the [R Set-up 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [LCD Color Tuning] screen appears.

2

Adjust the color.
Seven levels (225 patterns) are available
on the G-M and B-A axes.

LCD Color Tuning
G
A

B

±0

±0

MENU Cancel

M

±0

OK OK

Available operations
Four-way controller (23) Adjusts the tone of the colors between green (G)and magenta (M).
Four-way controller (45) Adjusts the tone of the colors between blue (B)and amber (A).

9
Changing Additional Settings

3
4| button

Resets the adjustment value.

E-dialDisplays a saved image in the background so
you can adjust the color while viewing theimage. This is useful for matching the color of
the monitor with that of a computer.

Press the 4 button.
Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Setting the Folder/File Number

279

Changing the Naming System of the Folder
You can select a naming system of the folder for storing images.

Date

The two digits of the month and day on which the picture was taken
are assigned as the folder name in the form of [xxx_MMDD]. [xxx] isa sequential number from 100 to 999. [MMDD] (month and day)appears according to the display style set in [Date Adjustment](p.270). (default setting)
Example) 101_0125: Folder for images taken on January 25thPENTX

The folder name is assigned in the form of [xxxPENTX].
Example) 101PENTX

Set in [Folder Name] of the [R Set-up 2]
menu (p.266).

1 2 3 4Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
MENU Cancel

±0
NTSC
MSC
Date
PENTX
OK OK

Creating New Folders

1

Select [Create New Folder] in the [R Set-up 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Create New Folder] screen appears.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Creates a new folder on an SD Memory Card. A folder is created with thenumber following the number of the folder currently being used.

280

2

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Create folder] andpress the 4 button.
A folder with a new number is created.

Create New Folder
Creates a new storage folder
with the following name:
101 PENTX
Create folder
CancelOK OK

Only one folder can be created using this operation. Multiple empty folders
cannot be created consecutively.

Selecting the File Number Setting
You can select a method for assigning the file number of an image when
saved to a new folder. Set in [File No.] in [Memory] (p.288) of the [A Rec.
Mode 4] menu.
The file number of the last image saved to the previous folder is saved andO subsequent images are assigned sequential file numbers even if a new
folder is created.
P

9

The file number of the first image saved to a folder returns to 0001 each timea new folder is created for saving images.
When the number of storable images exceeds 500, captured images are
divided into folders of 500 images each. However, in Exposure Bracketingshooting, images will be stored in the same folder until shooting is completed,even if the number of images exceeds 500.

Changing Additional Settings

Selecting the Power Settings

281

Setting the Auto Power Off Function
You can set the camera to turn off automatically if unused after a certain
length of time. Select from [1 min.] (default setting), [3 min.], [5 min.],[10 min.], [30 min.] or [Off].
Set in [Auto Power Off] of the [R Set-up 3]
menu (p.267).

1 2 3 4

Auto Power Off
AA Battery TypeReset

MENU Cancel

1min.
3min.
5min.
10min.
30min.
Off
OK OK• The Auto Power Off function does not work in the following situations.
- when the Live View image is displayed- when the slideshow is played back- when the camera is connected to a computer with an USB cable• If the camera turns off after the set length of time, perform one of the following
operations to reactivate it.
- Turn on the camera again.
- Press the shutter release button halfway.
- Press the Q button, the 3 button, or the M button.

9
Changing Additional Settings

282

Setting the Battery Type
Sets the type of AA batteries used in the camera. The default setting is[Auto-detect].

1

Select [AA Battery Type] in the [R Set-up 3] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [AA Battery Type] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (23)to select a battery type and press
the 4 button.
When set to [Auto-detect], the camera willautomatically detect the type of batteries
being used.

1 2 3 4

Auto Power Off
1min.
AUTO
AA Battery Type
AUTO
AUTO Auto-detect
Li
Lithium
Ni-MH Nickel-Metal Hydride
AL Alkaline
MENU Cancel

3

OK OK

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

9

When the type of batteries being used is different from the item you selected,
the battery level will not be correctly determined. Make sure that the correct
battery type is selected in the [AA Battery Type] setting. Usually, there is no
problem using [Auto-detect]. However in low temperatures and when using
batteries that were stored for long periods of time, set the appropriate battery
type so the camera can correctly determine the remaining battery level.

Changing Additional Settings

Setting the Photographer Information

283

The camera type, shooting conditions and other information areautomatically embedded in captured images in the Exif data format. You
can embed photographer information in this Exif.
Use the provided “PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” software (p.298) to check
the Exif information.

1

Select [Copyright Information] in the [R Set-up 2] menu
and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Copyright Information] screen appears.

2

3

Use the four-way controller (45)to select O or P.
O

Embeds copyright information in the
Exif.

P

Does not embed copyrightinformation in the Exif. (default
setting)

Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
MENU

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [Photographer]and press the four-way controller (5).
The text-entry screen appears.

9
Changing Additional Settings

284

4

Enter the text.
Up to 32 single-bytealphanumeric charactersand symbols can beentered.

Text selection
cursorPhotographer

FinishText input
cursorDelete One Character
MENU Cancel

OK Enter

Available operations

5

Four-way controller(2345)

Moves the text selection cursor.

E-dialMoves the text input cursor.

| button

Switches between upper and lower case letters.

4 button

Enters a character selected with the text
selection cursor at the position of the text input
cursor.

K/i button

Deletes a character at the position of the text
input cursor.

After entering the text, move thetext selection cursor to [Finish]and press the 4 button.
The camera returns to the [Copyright
Information] screen.

9

Copyright Information
Embed Copyright Data
Photographer
Copyright Holder
MENU

Changing Additional Settings

6
7

Use the four-way controller (23) to select [CopyrightHolder] and enter the text in the same way as[Photographer].
Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

Setting the DPOF Settings

285

You can order conventional photograph prints by taking the SD Memory
Card with recorded images to a store for printing.
DPOF (Digital Print Order Format) settings allow you to specify the
number of copies and whether to imprint the date.
• DPOF settings cannot be applied to RAW images and movies.
• You can make DPOF settings for up to 999 images.

1

Press the four-way controller (3) in Playback mode.
The playback mode palette appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (2345) to select r (DPOF)
and press the 4 button.
The screen to select how to change the settings is displayed.

3

Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Single Image] or [AllImages] and press the 4
button.

Single ImageAll Images

MENU

9

When [Single Image] is selectedin Step 3, use the four-way
controller (45) to select animage to set DPOF settings.

100-0105

Copies

MENU

00

Date

Date

OK OK

Changing Additional Settings

4

OK OK

286

5

Use the four-way controller (23) to select the number ofcopies.
You can set up to 99 copies.
K appears at the top right of the screen for images with DPOF settings.
To cancel the DPOF settings, set the number of copies to [00].

6Turn the e-dial to select O or P
for printing the date.
O

The date will be printed.

P

The date will not be printed.

Repeat Steps 4 to 6 to make DPOF
settings for other images (up to 999).

7

100-0105

Copies

MENU

01

Date

Date

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The DPOF settings for the selected image is saved and the camera
returns to Playback mode.
• Depending on the printer or printing equipment at the photo processing lab,the date may not be printed on the pictures even if the date for DPOF setting
is set to O.
• The number of copies specified in the All Images setting applies to all theimages, and that specified in the Single Image setting is canceled. Before
printing, check that the specified number is correct.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Correcting Defective Pixels in the
CMOS Sensor (Pixel Mapping)

287

Pixel Mapping is a function for mapping out and correcting defective pixels
in the CMOS sensor.

1

Select [Pixel Mapping] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Pixel Mapping] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Pixel Mapping] andpress the 4 button.
Defective pixels are mapped andcorrected, and the screen that was
displayed before selecting the menu
appears again.

Pixel Mapping
Checks the image sensor
and corrects defective pixels
Pixel Mapping
CancelOK OK

When the battery level is low, [Not enough battery power remaining to activate
Pixel Mapping] is displayed on the monitor. Use the AC adapter kit K-AC109(optional) or change to the battery with ample power remaining.

9
Changing Additional Settings

Selecting Settings to Save in the
Camera (Memory)288

You can select which function settings to save when the camera is turned
off. The following function settings can be saved.
Function

Default
SettingFunction

Default
Setting

Flash ModeO

Cross Processing

P

Drive Mode

O

Digital Filter

P

White BalanceO

HDR CaptureP

Custom ImageO

Shooting Info Display

P

Sensitivity

O

Playback Info DisplayO

EV Compensation

O

File No.

O

Flash Exposure Comp.

O

1

Select [Memory] in the [A Rec. Mode 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Memory 1] screen appears.

2

Use the four-way controller (23)to choose an item.
Turn the e-dial to display the [Memory 2]
screen.

9

Memory1 2

Flash Mode
Drive Mode
White Balance
Custom Image
Sensitivity
EV Compensation
Flash Exposure Comp.

Changing Additional Settings

MENU

3

Use the four-way controller (45) to select O or P.
O Settings are saved even when the camera is turned off.
P

4

Settings are cleared and returned to their default values when thecamera is turned off.

Press the 3 button twice.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

289• Set [File No.] to O (On) to continue the sequential numbering for the filename even if a new folder is created. Refer to “Selecting the File Number
Setting” (p.280).
• When the [R Set-up] menu is reset (p.310), all Memory settings return to thedefault values.
• If [Shooting Info Display] is set to P (Off), the status screen is always
displayed first when the camera is turned on. (p.26)

9
Changing Additional Settings

290

Memo

10 Connecting to a
ComputerThis chapter explains how to connect the camera to yourcomputer, install the supplied CD-ROM, etc.

Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer ............................................................ 292
Saving Images on Your Computer ................... 293
Using the Provided Software ............................ 296

292

Manipulating Captured Images on a
Computer
The captured still pictures and movies can be transferred to a computer by
connecting the W using a USB cable and can be managed using theprovided software.
We recommend the following system requirements to connect yourcamera to a computer or to use the software “PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4” included on the CD-ROM (S-SW110).
Windows
OS

Windows XP (SP3 or later), Windows Vista, or Windows 7 (canbe run as a 32-bit application on any x64 Edition of Windows.)

CPU

Pentium D 3.0 GHz equivalent or higher (Intel Core 2 Duoprocessor 2.0 GHz equivalent or higher recommended)RAM

2.0 GB minimum (3.0 GB or more recommended)Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)
Monitor

1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended)with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)

OthersUSB 2.0 port must be standard equipment

Macintosh

10

OS

Mac OS X 10.4.11, 10.5, or 10.6

CPUPowerPC G5 Dual-core 2.0 GHz or higher (Intel Core 2 Duoprocessor 2.0 GHz or higher recommended. Universal Binary
format.)RAM

2.0 GB minimum (4.0 GB or more recommended)Free Disk Space 1 GB minimum (8 GB or more recommended)

Connecting to a Computer

Monitor

1280×800 pixels or more (1920×1200 or more recommended)with 24-bit full color (approximately 16.77 million colors)

OthersUSB 2.0 port must be standard equipment

Saving Images on Your Computer

293

Setting the USB Connection Mode
Set the USB connection mode when connecting to a computer via theprovided USB cable (I-USB7). The default setting is [MSC].

1
2

Select [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [MSC] or [PTP].
Refer to p.294 for details.

3

1 2 3 4Brightness LevelLCD Color Tuning
Video OutUSB Connection
Folder Name
Create New Folder
Copyright Information
MENU Cancel

±0
NTSC
MSC
PTP

OK OK

Press the 4 button.
The setting is changed.

4

Press the 3 button.
The screen that was displayed before selecting the menu appears again.

10
Connecting to a Computer

294
MSC and PTP
MSC (Mass Storage Class)
A general-purpose driver program that handles devices connected tothe computer via USB as a memory device. Also indicates a standard
for controlling USB devices with this driver.
By simply connecting a device that supports USB Mass Storage
Class, you can copy, read, and write files from a computer without
installing a dedicated driver.
PTP (Picture Transfer Protocol)
A protocol that allows transfer of digital images and control of digital
cameras via USB, standardized as ISO 15740.
You can transfer image data between devices that support PTP
without installing a device driver.
Unless otherwise specified, select MSC when connecting the W
to your computer.

Saving Images by Connecting Your Camera
and Your Computer

1
2
10Turn your computer on.
Turn off your camera and use the provided USB cable toconnect your camera and your computer.

Connecting to a Computer

3295
Turn your camera on.
The camera is recognized as a removable disk or an SD Memory Cardwith a volume label “K-r”.
If the “K-r” dialog appears when the camera is turned on, select [Openfolder to view files using Windows Explorer] and click the OK button.

4

Save the captured images to your computer.
Drag and drop the image file(s) or the folder containing the image files inyour camera to the hard disk of your computer or the desktop.

5

Disconnect your camera from your computer.

10
Connecting to a Computer

Using the Provided Software

296“PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4” is included on the CD-ROM (S-SW110).
Using the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4, you can manage images savedon your computer, and develop RAW files taken with the W and adjust
the color of the images.
Compatible file formats: .bmp (BMP)/.jpg (JPEG)/.pef (files recorded in
PENTAX original RAW format)/.png (PNG)/.tif(TIFF)/.dng (DNG format RAW file)

Installing the Software
You can install the software from the provided CD-ROM.
When multiple accounts have been setup on your computer, log on withan account that has administrative rights before installing the software.

1Turn your computer on.
Make sure no other software is running.

2

Place the CD-ROM (S-SW110) into the CD-ROM drive on
your computer.
The [PENTAX Software Installer] screen appears.

If the [PENTAX Software Installer] screen does not appear
10
Connecting to a Computer• For Windows
1 Click [My Computer] from the Start menu.
2 Double-click the [CD-ROM drive (S-SW110)] icon.
3 Double-click the [Setup.exe] icon.
• For Macintosh
1 Double-click the CD-ROM (S-SW110) icon on the desktop.
2 Double-click the [PENTAX Installer] icon.

3297
Click [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4].
For Windows, proceed to Step 4.
For Macintosh, follow the instructions
on the screen to perform subsequent
steps.

4
5

Select the desired language inthe [Choose Setup Language]
screen and click [OK].

When the [InstallShield
Wizard] screen appears in theselected language, click[Next].
Follow the instructions on the screen
to perform subsequent steps.

10
Connecting to a Computer298

Screens of the PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4
When PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4 is launched, the following screen(browser) appears.
The screenshots used in this explanation are for Windows.

Browser tab set (default setting)
You can perform the file management functions such as viewing andorganizing the images.

1
2

3

4

3

10
Connecting to a Computer

5
1Menu Bar
This executes functions or makes various settings.
For Macintosh, the Menu bar appears at the top of the desktop.
2Tool Bar
Frequently used functions are provided as Tool bar buttons.

3Control Panel
Shooting information and settings of the selected image appear in thispanel. The set of tab pages displayed in Control Panel can be changed
by pressing the Browser, Laboratory and Custom buttons on the Tool
bar.

299

4File Display PaneThe file list and the images in the selected folder appear here.
5Status Bar
Information on the selected item appears.

Laboratory tab set (default setting)
The control panel for adjusting the image appears here.

10
Connecting to a Computer

300

Custom tab set (default setting)
The screen display can be customized here. The Custom tab pages
enable you to customize whether to show/hide the various tab pages inaccordance with your needs. By default, all tab pages are displayed.

Viewing Detailed Information on the Software
Refer to Help for details on using the software program.
10

1Connecting to a Computer

Click thebar.

button on the Tool

Or, select [PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility Help] from the [Help] menu.

301
Regarding Product Registration
To better serve you, please take a moment to register your software.
Click [Product Registration] on thescreen in Step 3 on p.297.

A world map for Internet ProductRegistration is displayed. If yourcomputer is connected to theInternet, click the displayed country
or region and then follow the
instructions to register your software.
Note that you can only register online
if your country or area is shown.

10
Connecting to a Computer

302

Memo

11 Appendix
Default Settings .................................................. 304
Resetting the Menus .......................................... 310
Functions Available with Various Lens
Combinations ..................................................... 312
Cleaning the CMOS Sensor ............................... 315
Optional Accessories ........................................ 320
Error Messages .................................................. 325
Troubleshooting ................................................. 328
Main Specifications ............................................ 331
Glossary .............................................................. 337
Index .................................................................... 342
WARRANTY POLICY .......................................... 348

304

Default Settings
The table below shows the factory default settings.
The functions set in Memory (p.288) are saved even when the camera isturned off.
Reset Setting
Yes: The setting returns to the default setting with the reset function(p.310).
No: The setting is saved even after reset.
Direct Keys
Item

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

Drive Mode

9 (Single Frame Shooting)

Yes

p.118
p.145
p.147
p.149

Flash Mode

Depends on Capture mode

Yes

p.75

White Balance

F (Auto)

Yes

p.200

AUTO (ISO 200 - 3200)

Yes

p.98

Reset
SettingPage

Sensitivity[A Rec. Mode] Menu
Item

*1

Custom Image

BrightYes

p.213

File Format

JPEG

Yes

p.195

E (4288×2848)

Yes

p.192

C (Best)

Yes

p.193

f

Yes

p.125

AE Metering

L (Multi-segment)

Yes

p.114

Select AF Pointb (5 AF Points)

Yes

p.129

Cross Processing

Yes

p.216

Digital FilterOff
Not use any filters

Yes

p.155

HDR Capture

Off

Yes

p.209

JPEG Recorded Pixels
JPEG Quality
AF Mode11

Default Setting

Appendix

305
Multiexposure

Item

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Number of Shots

2 times

Yes

Auto EV Adjustment

P (Off)Yes

IntervalInterval
Shooting

1sec.

Yes

2 images

Yes

Start Interval

Now

Yes

Start Time

Number of Shots

Page
p.153

p.151

12:00AM / 00:00

Yes

High-ISO NR

Auto

Yes

p.100

Slow Shutter Speed NR

Auto

Yes

p.102

b
(1280×720, 16:9)

Yes

Recorded Pixels
Quality Level
Movie

Sound
Cross Processing
Digital Filter
Movie Aperture Control

Live View

Instant
Review
D-Range
Setting

C (Best)Yesg (On)

Yes

Off

Yes

Not use any filters

Yes

Fixed

Yes

Shake Reductionl (Off)Yes

Autofocus Method

I (Face Detection AF)

YesShow Grid

Off

Yes

Info Overlay

O (On)

Yes

Histogram

Yes

Bright/Dark Area

P (Off)P (Off)

Display Time

1 sec.

Yes

p.165

p.160

Yes

Histogram

P (Off)Yes

Bright/Dark Area

P (Off)Yes

Enlarge Instant Review

p.276

O (On)

Yes

Highlight Correction

Off

Yes

p.207

Shadow Correction

Off

Yes

p.208

Off

Yes

Off

Yes

Color Space

sRGB

Yes

p.205

RAW File Format

PEF

Yes

p.196

p.211

11
Appendix

Distortion Correction
Lens
Correction Lat-Chromatic-Ab Adj

306
Item

Green
ButtonGreen Button

Green Button

Reset
Setting

Green Button

Yes

Custom Image *2—

Yes

Optical Preview *2—

YesHistogram

P (Off)Yes

Bright/Dark
Area

P (Off)Yes

O (On)

Yes

Digital Filter *2—

Yes

Cross Processing *2—

Yes

O (On)Yes

All RAW+

Yes

DigitalPreview *2 Enlarge
Instant
Review

Cancelafter 1 shot

One Push
JPEG/
File
Format *2 RAW/
RAW+ File
Formatp.197

P LINEYes

p.112

E-dial in Program

P SHIFT

Yes

p.105

Enable AF1

Yes

p.120
p.123

Cross Processing, Digital
Filter, HDR Capture,
Shooting Info Display

P (Off)Yes

Other than the above
functions

O (On)Yesk (On)
35 mm

Yes

p.142

Yes

p.143

Shake Reduction
Input Focal Length

p.288*1 The parameters specified in [Custom Image] are also reset.
*2 The setting returns to [Green Button] after reset.

11

Page

Action in M Mode

AF/AE-L Button

MemoryDefault Setting

Appendix

307

Playback Mode Palette
Item
Image Rotation

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

—

—

p.235

Toy Camera

Yes *1

p.253

ResizeMaximum size according to
the setting

—

p.250

Cropping

Maximum size according to
the setting

—

p.251

—

Yes

p.233

File Format: JPEG
Recorded Pixels: E
Quality Level: C

Yes

p.259

Digital Filter

Slideshow
RAW Development
Index

—

—

p.229

Image Comparison

—

—

p.228

Protect

—

No

p.240

DPOF

—

No

p.285

Movie Editing

—

—

p.171

IrSimple

—

—

p.244

Dueling Images

—

—

p.246

Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

Interval

3 sec.

Yes

Screen Effect

Off

Yes

P (Off)Yes*1 The parameters specified in [Digital Filter] are also reset.

[Q Playback] Menu
Item

Slideshow

Repeat Playback
Quick Zoom

Yes

P (Off)Yes

Auto Image Rotation

O (On)

Yes

i

Yes

Standard (IrSimple)

Yes

—

—

IrSimple

Automatic
Resizing
Transmission
MethodDelete All Images

p.222

11
p.244
p.239

Appendix

Off

Bright/Dark Area

p.232

308

[R Set-up] Menu
Item
Language/uDate Adjustment

World
Time

Page

According to default setting

No

p.273

According to default setting

No

p.270

Yes

World Time setting

W (Hometown)
According to default settingNo

Hometown (DST)

According to default setting

No

Destination (City)

Same as Hometown

No

Same as Hometown

No

According to default setting

No

p.274

Yes

p.269

Destination (DST)
Volume3

Setting

All O (On)p.270

Guide Display

3 sec.

Yes

p.274

Status Screen

1

Yes

p.276

Brightness Level

±0
±0

Yes

p.277

Yes

p.278

According to default setting

No

p.243

Yes

p.293

Folder Name

MSC
Date

Yes

p.279

Create New Folder

—

—

p.279

P (Off)

Yes

—

No

LCD Color Tuning
Video OutUSB Connection

Embed Copyright
Data

Copyright
Information Photographer

Copyright Holder

p.283

—

No

Auto Power Off

1 min.

Yes

AA Battery Type

Auto-detect
—

Yes

p.282

—

p.310

Pixel Mapping

—

—

p.287

Dust Alert

—

—

p.316

Dust Removal—

Start-up Action

P (Off)

—
Yes

p.315

Sensor Cleaning

—

—

p.318

Format

—

—

p.268

Reset

11

Reset
Setting

Hometown (City)

Text Size
Beep

Default Setting

Appendix

Dust
Removal

p.281

309

[A Custom Setting] Menu
Default Setting

Reset
Setting

Page

1. EV Steps

1/3 EV Steps

Yes

p.118

2. Sensitivity Steps

1 EV Step

Yes

p.99

3. Expanded Sensitivity

Off

Yes

p.99

4. Meter Operating Time

10 sec.

Yes

p.116

5. AE-L with AF Locked

Off

Yes

p.133

6. Link AE to AF Point

Off

Yes

p.115

7. Auto Bracketing Order

0-+

Yes

p.118

Item

8. Superimpose AF Area

On

Yes

p.130

9. AF.S Setting

Focus-priority

Yes

p.125

10. AF.C Setting

Focus-priority

Yes

p.126

11. AF Assist Light

On

Yes

p.127

12. WB When Using Flash

Auto White Balance

Yes

p.201

13. AWB in Tungsten Light

Subtle Correction

Yes—

14. AF with Remote Control

Off

Yes

p.148

15. Remote Control in Bulb

Mode1

Yes

p.114

16. Release While Charging

Off

Yes

p.81

17. Flash in Wireless Mode

On

Yes

p.184

18. Saving Rotation Info

On

Yes

p.235

19. Save Menu Location

Reset Menu Location

Yes

p.275
p.136

20. Catch-in Focus

Off

Yes

21. AF Fine Adjustment

OffYes *1

p.128

22. Using Aperture Ring

Prohibited

Yes

p.314

Reset Custom Functions

—

—

p.311

*1 The adjustment values are reset only for [Reset] in the [21. AF Fine Adjustment] screen.

11
Appendix

Resetting the Menus

310

Resetting the Rec. Mode/Playback/Set-up
Menus
Settings in the [A Rec. Mode] menu, [Q Playback] menu, [R Set-up]
menu, direct keys and playback mode palette can be reset to default
settings.
Language/u, Date Adjustment, the city and DST settings for World Time,
Text Size, Video Output, Copyright Information and [A Custom Setting] menu
settings are not reset.

1

Select [Reset] in the [R Set-up 3] menu and press the fourway controller (5).
The [Reset] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screenthat was displayed before selecting themenu appears again.

Reset
Returns to default settings

Reset
CancelOK OK

11Appendix

311

Resetting the Custom Menu
Reset settings in [A Custom Setting] menu to default values.

1

Select [Reset Custom Functions] in the [A Custom
Setting 4] menu and press the four-way controller (5).
The [Reset Custom Functions] screen appears.

2

Press the four-way controller (2)to select [Reset] and press the
4 button.
The settings are reset, and the screenthat was displayed before selecting themenu appears again.

Reset Custom Functions
Returns the custom function
settings to default values
Reset
CancelOK OK

11Appendix

312

Functions Available with Various
Lens Combinations
Only DA, DA L and FA J lenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses which have an s
(Auto) position on the aperture ring can be used with factory default
settings. Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for otherlenses and D FA/FA/F/A lenses with aperture ring set to a position otherthan s.
z : Functions are available when the aperture ring is set to the s position.
# : Some functions are restricted.
× : Functions are unavailable.

11
AppendixLens DA[Mount type] DA L
D FA

FA J
FA *6

F *6

A

M
P

[KAF]
[KAF2]

[KAF]

[KA]

[K]

Function[KAF][KAF2][KAF3]

Autofocus(Lens only)(With AF adapter 1.7×) *1

z
–

z
–

z
–

–
#*8

–
#*8

Manual focus(With the focus indicator) *2(With matte field)

z
z

z
z

z
z

z
z

z
z

Quick-Shift Focus System

#*5

×

×

×

×

Five AF points/Eleven AF points

z

z

z

#*8

×

Multi-segment metering

z

z

z

z

×

e (Program) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

K (Sensitivity Priority) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

b (Shutter Priority) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

c (Aperture Priority) mode

z

z

z

z

#*9

a (Manual) mode

z

z

z

z

#

P-TTL Auto Flash *3

z

z

z

z

×

Power Zoom

–

×

–

–

–

Automatically obtaining the lens focal
length information when using the Shake
Reduction function

z

z

z

×

×

Lens Correction function *4

z

×*7

×

×

×

*1 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F2.8 or faster. Only available at the s position.
*2 Lenses with a maximum aperture of F5.6 or faster.
*3 When using the built-in flash and AF540FGZ, AF360FGZ, AF200FG or AF160FC.
*4 Aberration correction is available in [Lens Correction] of the [A Rec. Mode 3] menu. The[Distortion Correction] setting is disabled when using a DA 10-17mm FISH-EYE lens.
*5 Only available with compatible lenses.
*6 To use an FA/F SOFT 85 mm F2.8 lens or FA SOFT 28 mm F2.8 lens, set [22. Using
Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu to [Permitted]. Pictures can be takenwith the aperture you set, but only within manual aperture range.
*7 Only available with compatible lenses (FA 31mm F1.8 Limited, FA 43mm F1.9 Limited, or
FA 77mm F1.8 Limited).
*8 The focusing area is fixed to O (Spot).
*9 c (Aperture Priority) Automatic Exposure with the aperture open. (Adjusting the aperturering has no effect on the actual aperture value.)

313

Lens names and mount names
DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and FA zoom lenses with power zoom
use the KAF2 mount. DA lenses with an ultrasonic motor and no AF coupler
use the KAF3 mount.
FA single focal length lenses (non-zoom lenses), DA or DA L lenses
without an ultrasonic motor and D FA, FA J and F lenses use the KAF
mount.
Refer to respective lens manuals for details. Note that this camera is not
equipped with a power zoom function.

Lenses and accessories that cannot be
used with this camera

Lens and Built-in FlashThe built-in flash cannot be regulated and fully discharges when A lenses
not set to the s (Auto) position, pre A lenses or soft focus lenses are used.
Note that the built-in flash cannot be used as an Auto Flash.

11
Appendix

When the aperture ring is set to other than the s (Auto) position or a lens
without an s position or accessories such as an auto extension tube or
auto bellows are used, the camera will not operate unless [22. Using
Aperture Ring] is set to [Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4] menu.
Refer to “Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]” (p.314) for restrictions that
apply.
All camera capture modes are available when using DA/DA L/FA J or
lenses with an aperture s position set to the s position.

314

Notes on [22. Using Aperture Ring]
When [22. Using Aperture Ring] is set to[Permitted] in the [A Custom Setting 4]menu, the shutter can be released even if theaperture ring of the D FA, FA, F or A lens is
not set to the s (Auto) position or a lens
without an s position is attached. However,some features will be restricted as shown
below.

22. Using Aperture Ring
1 Prohibited
2 Permitted

Shutter will release whenaperture ring is not set to the"A" position
OK OK
MENU Cancel

Restrictions on using lenses with aperture ring set to a position other than s
Lens Used
D FA, FA, F, A, M (lensonly or with auto
diaphragm accessories
such as auto extension
tube K)

Exposure
Mode

Restriction

The aperture remains open regardlessof the aperture ring position. The
c (Aperture shutter speed changes in relation to
Priority) mode the open aperture but an exposure
error may occur. In the viewfinder,[F--] appears for the aperture indicator.

D FA, FA, F, A, M, S (withc (Aperture Pictures can be taken with a specified
diaphragm accessories
Priority) mode aperture value but an exposure error
such as extension tube K)
may occur. In the viewfinder, [F--]Manual diaphragm lens such c (Aperture appears for the aperture indicator.
as reflex lens (lens only)
Priority) mode

FA, F SOFT 85mm, FA
SOFT 28mm (lens only)

Pictures can be taken with a specified
aperture value in the manual aperture
range. In the viewfinder, [F--] appearsc (Aperture for the aperture indicator.
Priority) mode When the depth of field is checked(Optical Preview), exposure metering
starts and the exposure can bechecked.

11
Appendix

All lensesa (Manual)
mode

Pictures can be taken with a set
aperture value and shutter speed. In
the viewfinder, [F--] appears for theaperture indicator. When the depth offield is checked (Optical Preview),
exposure metering starts and theexposure can be checked.

If the aperture is set to a position other than s, the camera operates in c(Aperture Priority) mode regardless of the mode dial setting except when set toa (Manual) or C (Movie) mode.

Cleaning the CMOS Sensor

315

If the CMOS sensor becomes dirty or dusty, shadows may appear in theimage in certain situations such as when shooting against a whitebackground. This indicates that the CMOS sensor must be cleaned.

Removing Dust by Shaking the CMOS Sensor(Dust Removal)
Shaking the CMOS sensor removes dust that has collected.

1

Select [Dust Removal] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press
the four-way controller (5).
The [Dust Removal] screen appears.

2

Press the 4 button.
The Dust Removal function is activatedby shaking the CMOS sensor.
To activate the Dust Removal function
every time the camera is turned on, select[Start-up Action] and use the four-way
controller (45) to select O.
When Dust Removal is completed, thecamera returns to the [R Set-up 4] menu.

Dust Removal
Dust Removal
Start-up Action

MENU

OK Start

11
Appendix316

Detecting Dust on the CMOS Sensor(Dust Alert)
Dust Alert is a function that detects dust adhering to the CMOS sensor andvisually displays the location of the dust.
You can save an image indicating the dust location and display it when
performing sensor cleaning (p.318).
The following conditions must be met before using the Dust Alert function:- A DA, DA L, FA J lens or a D FA, FA or F lens that has an s (Auto)position is attached.
- The aperture is set to the s position when using a lens with anaperture ring.
- The mode dial is set to any mode other than C (Movie).
- The focus mode lever is set to =.
• The exposure time may be extremely long when using the Dust Alert
function. Note that if the direction of the lens is changed before processing iscomplete, dust will not be detected properly.
• Depending on the subject conditions or temperature, dust may not be
detected properly.
• The Dust Alert image can only be displayed during sensor cleaning within 30
minutes from the time the image is saved. If more than 30 minutes elapse,
save a new Dust Alert image and then perform sensor cleaning.
• The saved Dust Alert image cannot be displayed in Playback mode.
• The Dust Alert image is saved only when an SD Memory Card is inserted.

1

Select [Dust Alert] in the [R Set-up 4] menu and press thefour-way controller (5).
The [Dust Alert] screen appears.

11
Appendix

2317
Fully display a white wall or otherbright subject with no detail inthe viewfinder and press the
shutter release button fully.

Dust Alert
Checks for dust on the sensor.
Press shutter release button
to reveal dust location

After image processing is performed, theDust Alert image appears.
MENU
If the message [The operation could not
be completed correctly] is displayed,press the 4 button and take another picture.

3

SHUTTER Check

Check the sensor for dust.

x1

OK ExitAvailable operations
E-dial/M button

4

Displays the Dust Alert image at full screen display.

Press the 4 button.
The Dust Alert image is saved and the camera returns to the [R Set-up4] menu.
• Regardless of the camera settings, the Dust Alert image will be taken withspecific shooting conditions.
• Press the M button or turn the e-dial when the Dust Alert image isdisplayed to view the sensor area at full screen display.

11
Appendix318

Removing Dust with a Blower
Raise the mirror up and open the shutter when cleaning the CMOS sensor
with a blower.
Please contact a PENTAX Service Center for professional cleaning
because the CMOS sensor is a precision part. Cleaning services involvea fee.
You can use the optional Imagesensor Cleaning kit O-ICK1 (p.324) whencleaning the CMOS sensor.
• Do not use a spray type blower.
• Do not clean the sensor when the shutter speed is set to h.
• To prevent dirt and dust from accumulating on the CMOS sensor, keep thelens mount cap on the camera when a lens is not attached.
• When the battery level is low, the message [Not enough battery power
remaining to clean sensor] is displayed on the monitor.
• It is recommended to use the AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional) whencleaning the sensor. If you are not using the AC adapter kit K-AC109(optional), please install the battery with ample power remaining. If thebattery capacity becomes low during cleaning, a warning beep will sound. In
this case, stop cleaning immediately.
• Do not put the tip of the blower inside the lens mount area. If the power isturned off, this may cause damage to the shutter, CMOS sensor and themirror.
• The self-timer lamp blinks while cleaning the sensor.
• This camera features a CMOS sensor corresponding to the shake reduction
system, and it may generate a vibration sound while cleaning the CMOS
sensor. It is not a malfunction.

11
Appendix1
2
3Turn the camera off and remove the lens.
Turn the camera on.
Select [Sensor Cleaning] in the [R Set-up 4] menu andpress the four-way controller (5).
The [Sensor Cleaning] screen appears.

4319
Use the four-way controller (23)to select [Mirror Up] and press
the 4 button.
The mirror is locked in the up position.
If you used Dust Alert to detect dust on
the sensor within the last 30 minutes, theDust Alert image appears on the monitor.
Clean the sensor while checking thelocation of the dust.

5

Sensor Cleaning
Raises mirror and opens shutter
for access to clean sensor.
Turn the power off to finish
Mirror Up
CancelOK OK

Clean the CMOS sensor.
Use a brush-less blower to remove dirt
and dust from the CMOS sensor. Using a
blower with a brush may scratch the
CMOS sensor. Do not wipe the CMOS
sensor with a cloth.

67

Turn off the camera.
Attach the lens after the mirror returns to its original
position.

11
Appendix320

Optional Accessories
A number of dedicated accessories are available for this camera. Contact
a PENTAX Service Center for details regarding accessories.
Products marked with an asterisk (*) are the same as those supplied withthe camera.

Power Supply Accessories
Battery Charger kit K-BC109 (*)(Kit includes Battery Charger D-BC109 and AC plug cord.)
Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI109 (*)
AC Adapter kit K-AC109(Kit includes AC Adapter D-AC50, DC Coupler D-DC109 and AC plugcord.)
Lets you power your camera from an AC outlet.
AA battery holder D-BH109
Adapter for using four commerciallyavailable AA batteries.

D-BH109
The AC adapter and battery charger are only sold as a kit.

11
Appendix

321
Flash Accessories
Auto Flash AF540FGZ
Auto Flash AF360FGZ
The AF540FGZ and AF360FGZ are
P-TTL auto flash units with a maximum
guide number of 54 and 36 (ISO 100/m),
respectively. Their features include
slave-sync flash, contrast-control-sync
flash, high-speed sync flash, wirelessflash, slow-speed sync and trailingcurtain sync flash.

AF540FGZ

AF360FGZ

Auto Flash AF200FG
The AF200FG is a P-TTL auto flash unit
with a maximum guide number of 20(ISO 100/m). It features contrastcontrol-sync flash and slow-speed sync
flash when combined with an
AF540FGZ or AF360FGZ unit.

11
AF160FC

Appendix

Auto Macro Flash AF160FC
The AF160FC is a flash systemespecially designed for macro
photography to take close, shadowless
pictures of small objects. It is compatible
with existing TTL auto flash functions
and it can be used with a wide range of
PENTAX cameras by using provided
adapter rings.

AF200FG

322

Hot Shoe Adapter FG
Extension Cord F5P

Hot Shoe Adapter FG

Off-Camera Shoe Adapter F
Use the adapters and cords to use theexternal flash away from the camera.

Off-camera Shoe Adapter F

Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10
When using the AF540FGZ or
AF360FGZ as a wireless flash, thislarge clip is used for setting the external
flash on a desk or table.
Off-camera Shoe Clip CL-10

For Viewfinder

11

Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53
This viewfinder accessory is for
magnifying up to approximately 1.18
times.
When the eyecup is attached to theW with a viewfinder magnification of
approximately 0.85 times, the combined
magnification becomes approximately
1.0 times, making manual focusingmuch easier.

AppendixMagnifier FBThis viewfinder accessory is for
magnifying the central area of the
viewfinder 2×.
You can see the entire view by simply
flipping up the accessory from the eyepiece, as it is a hinge-type magnifier.

Magnifier Eyecup O-ME53

Magnifier FB

323

Ref-converter A
This is an accessory that changes the
viewfinder viewing angle at 90°
intervals. The viewfinder magnification
can be switched between 1× and 2×.

Ref-converter A

Diopter correction lens adapter M
This accessory adjusts the diopter.
Install it on the viewfinder.
If it is difficult to see the viewfinder
image clearly, choose one of the eightcorrection of approximately –5 to+3 m–1 (per meter).

Diopter correction lens adapter M

Eyecup FQ (*)
ME Viewfinder Cap

Remote Control
Lets you shoot pictures from within 4 m of the front of the camera.
Remote Control F

Remote Control Waterproof O-RC1
11
Appendix324
Camera Case/Strap
Camera Case O-CC84
Camera Strap O-ST53 (*)
Hand Strap O-ST991
Hand Strap O-ST992
Free Length Strap O-ST842

Imagesensor Cleaning Kit O-ICK1
Use this kit to clean the optical parts
such as the CMOS sensor and lens of
this camera.

OthersBody Mount Cap K
Hot Shoe Cover FK (*)
USB Cable I-USB7 (*)
AV Cable I-AVC7

11
AppendixError Messages

325

Description

Memory card full

The SD Memory Card is full and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or delete unwanted images. (p.52, p.84)
Data may be saved when you perform thefollowing operations.
• Change the file format to JPEG. (p.195)• Change the JPEG Recorded Pixels or JPEG
Quality setting. (p.192, p.193)

No image

There are no images that can be played backon the SD Memory Card.

This image cannot be
displayed

You are trying to play back an image in a format
not supported by this camera. You may be able
to play it back on another brand of camera or
your computer.

No card in the camera

The SD Memory Card is not inserted in thecamera. (p.52)

Cannot use this card

The inserted SD Memory Card is notcompatible with this camera.

Memory card error

The SD Memory Card has a problem, andimage capture and playback are impossible. It
may be viewable on a computer but not with thiscamera.

Card is not formatted

The SD Memory Card you have inserted isunformatted or has been formatted on anotherdevice and is not compatible with this camera.
Use the card after formatting it with this camera.
(p.268)

Card is locked

The write-protect switch on an SD Memory
Card you have inserted is locked. Unlock the
SD Memory Card. (p.53)

The card iselectronically locked

Data is protected by the SD Memory Card
security feature.

This image cannot be
enlarged

You are trying to enlarge an image that cannot be
enlarged.

This image is protected

You are trying to delete an image that is
protected. Remove protection from the image.
(p.240)

11
Appendix

Error Message

326

11

Error Message

Description

Battery depleted

The battery is exhausted. Install a fully charged
battery or new AA batteries in the camera.
(p.43)

Not enough battery
power remaining
to clean sensor

Appears during sensor cleaning if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or new AA batteries, or use the AC
adaptor kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)

Not enough battery
power remaining toactivate Pixel Mapping

Appears during Pixel Mapping if the battery
level is insufficient. Install a fully charged
battery or new AA batteries, or use the AC
adaptor kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)

Image folder cannot becreatedThe maximum folder number (999) and filenumber (9999) are being used, and no more
images can be saved. Insert a new SD Memory
Card or format the card. (p.268)

Unable to store image

The image could not be saved because of an
SD Memory Card error.

Settings not stored

The DPOF settings could not be saved because
SD Memory Card is full. Delete unwanted
images and perform DPOF setting again. (p.84)

The operation could not becompleted correctly

The camera was unable to measure the manual
white balance or detect dust on the sensor. Try
the operation again. (p.202, p.316)

No more images can beselected

You cannot select 100 or more images at a timefor Index (p.229) and Select & Delete (p.236).

No image can be processed

There are no images that can be processedusing Digital Filter (p.253) or RAW
Development (p.259) function.

This image cannot beprocessed

Appears when you try to perform Resize(p.250), Cropping (p.251), Digital Filter (p.253),
or RAW Development (p.259) for images
captured with other cameras, or when you try to
perform Resize or Cropping for minimum filesize images.

Appendix

The camera failed to create
an image

The creation of an index print image failed.
(p.229)327
Error Message

Description

Live View cannot be used because theCamera overheated.
camera’s internal temperature is too high.
Disabling Live View temporarily
Press the 4 button and try using Live View
to protect circuitry
again when the camera has cooled down.

Cannot start Live View

Appears when Live View is started when [22.
Using Aperture Ring] in the [A Custom Setting
4] menu is set to [Prohibited] and the lens
aperture ring is set to a position other than s,
or a lens without an s position is being used.

This function is not available
in the current mode

You are trying to set a function that is notavailable when the capture mode is set to
Picture mode, H (Scene) mode or C (Movie)
mode.

11
Appendix328

Troubleshooting
In rare cases, the camera may not operate correctly due to static
electricity. This can be remedied by taking the battery out and putting itback in again. When the mirror remains in the up position, take the battery
out and put it back in again. Then, the mirror will retract when the camera
is turned on again. After these procedures are done, if the camera
operates correctly, it does not require any repairs.
We recommend checking the following items before contacting a service
center.
Problem

Cause
Battery is notinstalled

The camera
Battery is notdoes notinstalled properly
turn onRemedyCheck if battery is installed. If not, install a
fully charged battery.
Check the orientation of battery.
Re-insert battery according to the +/–symbols. (p.45, p.46)

The battery power is Replace with a charged battery or use thelow
AC adapter kit K-AC109 (optional). (p.50)

The shutter
cannot bereleased

11
Appendix

Autofocus
does notwork

The lens aperturering is set to otherthan the s position

Set the lens aperture ring to the s position(p.104) or select [Permitted] in [22. Using
Aperture Ring] of the [A Custom Setting 4]
menu. (p.314)

The built-in flash is
charging

Wait until charging is finished.

There is no available Insert an SD Memory Card with available
space on the SD
space or delete unwanted images. (p.52,
Memory Card
p.84)
RecordingWait until recording is finished.

The subject isdifficult to focus on

Autofocus cannot focus well on subjects
that have low contrast (the sky, white walls,etc.), dark colors, intricate designs, rapidlymoving objects or scenery shot through awindow or a net-like pattern. Lock focus on
another object located at the same distanceas your subject, then aim at the target andpress the shutter release button fully.
Alternatively, use manual focus. (p.134)

329
Problem

Autofocus
does not
work

Cause

RemedyPosition the subject in the focus frame in the
middle of the viewfinder. If the subject is
The subject is not in outside the focusing area, aim the camera
the focusing areaat the subject and lock the focus, thencompose a picture and press the shutter
release button fully. (p.132)
The subject is too
closeMove away from the subject and take apicture.

The focus mode is
set to \Set the focus mode lever to =. (p.122)[AF Mode] is set tok

Autofocus is not locked (focus lock) when [AFMode] is set to k (including when the
k setting is automatically selected inf). The camera will continue focusing on
the subject while the shutter release button ispressed halfway. If there is a subject that you
want to focus on, set [AF Mode] to l
(Single mode) and use the focus lock. (p.125)

The focus
cannot belockedSet Capture mode to any setting other than
The Capture mode
\ (Moving Object) in Picture mode, oris set to \ in Picturen (Stage Lighting), l (Night Snap),
mode, or n, l, R,
R (Kids), or Y (Pet) in H (Scene) mode.
or Y in H mode.
(p.91)The AE Lockfunction
The shutter speed is Set the shutter speed to any mode other
does notset to hthan h. (p.113)
operateThe built-in
flash does
notdischarge

When the flash
mode is set to C or Set the flash mode to b (Manual FlashC, the flash will not Discharge) or D (Manual Flash+Red-eye
discharge if theReduct.). (p.75)
subject is bright
The mode dial is set Set mode dial to any setting other thanto aa (Flash Off). (p.91)

The power
The camera doeszoom
not have the powersystem does
zoom function
not work

Set H (Scene) mode to any mode otherthan A (Night Scene), K (Sunset),n (Stage Lighting), Z (Night Scene
HDR), U (Candlelight), or E (Museum).
(p.93)
Use manual zoom. (p.74)

11
Appendix

H mode is set to
A, K, n, Z, U,
or E

330
Problem
The USB
connection
with acomputerdoes notwork
properly

Shake
Reduction
does not
work

Cause

The USB connection Set [USB Connection] in the [R Set-up 2]
mode is set to [PTP] menu to [MSC]. (p.293)

The Shake
Reduction function
is offSet [Shake Reduction] to on. (p.142)

The Shake
Reduction function
is not set properly

If a lens for which the focal length
information cannot be obtained is used, set
the focal length in the [Input Focal Length]
screen. (p.143)

Shutter speed is too
low for the Shake
Reduction function Set [Shake Reduction] to off and use ato be effective when tripod.
panning or shootingnight scenes, etc.
The subject is too
close

11

RemedyMove away from the subject, or turn off the
Shake Reduction function and use a tripod.

Appendix

Main Specifications

331

Model Description
Type

TTL autofocus, auto-exposure SLR digital-still camera withbuilt-in retractable P-TTL flash

Lens Mount

PENTAX KAF2 bayonet mount (AF coupler, lens information
contacts, K-mount with power contacts)

Compatible Lens

KAF3, KAF2 (power zoom not compatible), KAF, KA mount lenses

Image Capture Unit
Image Sensor

Primary color filter, CMOS, Size: 23.6 × 15.8 (mm)

Effective Pixels

Approx. 12.4 megapixels

Total Pixels

Approx. 12.9 megapixels

Dust Removal

SP coating and CMOS sensor operations with the Dust Alert
function

AUTO/200 to 12800 (EV steps can be set to 1 EV, 1/2 EV, or
Sensitivity (Standard
1/3 EV), expandable from ISO 100 to ISO 25600. Up to ISO
Output)1600 in h mode.
Image Stabilizer
Type

CMOS image sensor shift

Effective
Compensation
Range

Up to 4 EV (depending on the used lens type and shooting
conditions)File Formats
File Format

RAW (PEF/DNG), JPEG (Exif 2.21), DCF2.0 compliant

Recorded Pixels

JPEG: E (4288 × 2848 pixels), J (3936 × 2624 pixels),
P (3072 × 2048 pixels), i (1728 × 1152 pixels)
RAW: E (4288 × 2848 pixels)

Quality Level

RAW (12bit): PEF, DNG JPEG: C (Best), D (Better),E (Good), RAW + JPEG simultaneous capturing compatible

Color Space

sRGB, AdobeRGB
SD/SDHC Memory Card

Storage Folder

Date (100_1018, 100_1019...)/PENTX (100PENTX, 101PENTX...)

Appendix

Storage Medium

11

332
Viewfinder
Type

Penta-mirror viewfinder

Coverage (FOV)

Approx. 96%

Magnification

Approx. 0.85× (50 mm F1.4 · ∞)Eye-Relief Length

Approx. 19.1 mm (from the view window), Approx. 21.6 mm(from the center of lens)

Diopter Adjustment

Approx. -2.5 to +1.5m-1

Focusing
ScreenNatural-Bright-Matte II focusing screen

Live View
Type

TTL method using CMOS image sensor

Focusing Mechanism

Contrast detection + Face detection, Contrast detection, Phasematching

Display

Field of View approx. 100%, Magnified view (= mode: 2×, 4×,
6×/\ mode: 2×, 4×, 6×, 8×, 10×),
Grid display (4 × 4 Grid, Golden Section, Scale display), Bright/
dark area warning, Histogram

LCD Monitor
Type

Wide viewing angle TFT color LCD

Size

3.0 inches

Dots

Approx. 921,000 dots

Adjustment

Brightness and colors adjustable

Preview
Type

Optical preview and digital preview (can be assigned to the |button from the menu)

White Balance

11
AppendixAuto

TTL method using CMOS image sensor

PresetDaylight, Shade, Cloudy, Fluorescent Light (D: Daylight Color,
N: Daylight White, W: Cool White, L: Warm White), Tungsten
Light, Flash, f, Manual

ManualConfiguration using the display screen

Fine Adjustment

Adjustable ±7 steps on A-B axis or G-M axis

333
Autofocus System
Type

TTL: phase-matching autofocus

Focus Sensor

SAFOX IX, 11 points (9 cross type focus points in the center)

Brightness Range

EV-1 to 18 (ISO100)

AF ModeAuto AF (f), Single AF (l), Continuous AF (k)Focus priority or shutter priority mode for l
Focus priority or FPS priority mode for k

AF Point Selection

Auto: 5 points, Auto: 11 points, Select, Center

AF Assist Light

Dedicated LED AF assist lightMeteringType

TTL open aperture, 16 segmented metering, center-weighted
and spot metering

Exposure
Compensation

EV1 to 21.5 (ISO200 · 50mm F1.4)

Exposure Mode

Auto Picture mode, Picture mode (Portrait, Landscape, Macro,Moving Object, Night Scene Portrait, Flash Off)
Scene mode (Night Scene, Surf & Snow, Food, Sunset, Stage
Lighting, Night Snap, Night Scene HDR, Kids, Pet, Candlelight,
Museum)* In Stage Lighting, Night Snap, and Night Scene HDR, thefile format is fixed to JPEG.
Program, Sensitivity Priority, Shutter Priority, Aperture Priority,
Manual, Bulb

EV Compensation±3 EV (1/2 EV steps or 1/3 EV steps can be selected)

AE Lock

Can be assigned to =/L button from the menu. (Timermethod: two times the meter operating time set in the custom
function setting), Continuous as long as the shutter releasebutton is pressed halfway.

Shutter
TypeElectronically controlled vertical-run focal-plane shutter

Shutter Speed

Auto: 1/6000 to 30 sec., Manual: 1/6000 to 30 sec. (1/3 EV
steps or 1/ 2EV steps), Bulb

11

Drive Modes
Single frame, Continuous (Hi, Lo), Self-timer (12s, 2s), Remote
Control (immediately, 3 sec., continuous), Auto Bracketing (3frames)Continuous Shooting

Approx. 6 fps, JPEG (E · C · Continuous Hi): up to 25
frames, RAW: up to 12 frames
Approx. 2 fps, JPEG (E · C · Continuous Lo): until SD
Memory Card is full, RAW: up to 36 frames

AppendixMode Selection

334
Built-in FlashType

Built-in P-TTL flash with serial control
GN: approx. 16 (ISO200/m), approx. 12 (ISO100/m)
Angle of view: equivalent to angle of view of 28mm lens (35mmformat equivalent)Flash Mode

P-TTL, Red-eye Reduction, Slow-speed Sync, Trailing Curtain
Sync
High-Speed Sync and Wireless Sync are also available withPENTAX dedicated external flash.

Sync Speed

1/180 sec.

Flash Exposure
Compensation-2.0 to +1.0EV

Capture Functions
Custom Image

Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, BleachBypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome

Noise Reduction

Slow Shutter Speed NR, High-ISO NR

Dynamic Range
Setting

Highlight Correction, Shadow Correction

Lens Correction

Distortion Correction, Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction

Cross Processing

Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3

Digital Filter

Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Soft,Starbust, Fish-eye, Custom Filter

HDR Capture

Auto, Standard, Strong 1, Strong 2, Strong 3, Automaticcomposition correction function

Multi-exposure

Select the number of shots between 2 and 9. Auto EV
adjustment available.

Interval Shooting

Capture Interval setting (1 sec. to 24 hr.), Start Interval setting(immediate, designated time), Captures up to 999 images

Movie
File Format

Motion JPEG (AVI)

Recorded Pixels

b (1280 × 720, 16:9, 25 fps), c (640 × 480, 4:3, 25 fps)

Quality Level

C (Best), D (Better), E (Good)

11

Sound

Built-in monaural microphone

Appendix

Recording Time

Up to 25 minutes; automatically stops recording if the internal
temperature of the camera becomes high.

Custom Image

Bright, Natural, Portrait, Landscape, Vibrant, Muted, BleachBypass, Reversal Film, Monochrome

Cross Processing

Random, Preset 1-3, Favorite 1-3

Digital Filter

Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Extract Color, Color

335
Playback Functions

Playback View

Single frame, image comparison, multi-image display (4, 9, 16,
36, 81 segmentation), display magnification (up to 16×,
scrolling and quick magnification available), rotating, histogram(Y histogram, RGB histogram), bright/dark area warning,detailed information display, copyright information display(photographer, copyright holder), folder display, calendar
display, slideshow

DeleteDelete single image, delete all, select & delete, delete folder,delete instant review image

Digital Filter

Toy Camera, Retro, High Contrast, Sketch Filter, Water Color,
Pastel, Posterization, Miniature, Base Parameter Adjustment,
Monochrome, Color, Extract Color, Soft, Starburst, Fish-eye,
Slim, HDR, Custom Filter

RAW Development

File Format (JPEG), Custom Image, White Balance, Sensitivity,
High-ISO NR, Shadow Correction, Distortion Correction,
Lateral Chromatic Aberration Correction, Color Space

Edit

Resize, Cropping (aspect ratio and slant adjustment available),
Index, Movie Edit (divide or delete selected frames), Capturing
a JPEG still picture from a movie

Customization
Custom Functions

22 items

Mode Memory

13 items

Custom Button| button (Green button, Custom Image, Optical preview,
Digital preview, Digital Filter, Cross Processing, One Push File
Format)=/L button (AF, AE-L)

Text Size

Standard, Large

World Time

World Time settings for 75 cities (28 time zones)

Language

English, French, German, Spanish, Portuguese, Italian, Dutch,
Danish, Swedish, Finnish, Polish, Czech, Hungarian, Turkish,
Greek, Russian, Korean, Traditional Chinese, Simplified
Chinese, and Japanese

AF Fine Adjustment±10 steps, Uniform adjustment

11
AppendixNames of “Photographer” and “Copyright Holder” areCopyright Information embedded to the image file.
Revision history can be checked using the provided software.

336Power Supply
Battery Type

Rechargeable Lithium-ion Battery D-LI109
With AA battery holder D-BH109 (optional), four AA batteries(lithium, Ni-MH rechargeable, alkaline) can be used.

AC Adapter

AC Adapter Kit K-AC109 (optional)

Battery Life

(With D-LI109)
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.
470 images,(without flash usage): approx. 560 images
Playback time: approx. 300 minutes(With AA lithium batteries)
Number of recordable images (with 50% flash usage): approx.
1,000 images,(without flash usage): approx. 1,600 images
Playback time: approx. 620 minutes* Tested in compliance with CIPA standard. Actual results
may vary depending on the shooting conditions/circumstances.

Interfaces
Connection PortUSB 2.0 (high-speed compatible)/AV output terminal

USB Connection

MSC/PTPVideo Output Format NTSC/PAL
Infrared Connection

Infrared connection in/out (IrSimple)

Dimensions and Weight
Dimensions

Approx. 125 mm (W) × 97 mm (H) × 68 mm (D) (excluding
protrusions)

WeightApprox. 544 g (body only), Approx. 598 g (including dedicatedbattery and SD Memory Card)

Accessories

Package Contents

USB Cable I-USB7, Strap O-ST53, Rechargeable Lithium-ion
Battery D-LI109, Battery Charger D-BC109, Software (CDROM) S-SW110,<Mounted on the camera> Eyecup FQ, Hot shoe cover FK,
Body mount cover

Software

PENTAX Digital Camera Utility 4

11
AppendixGlossary

337

AdobeRGB
Color space recommended by Adobe Systems, Inc. for commercial
printing. Wider range of color reproduction than sRGB. Covers most of thecolor range so colors available only when printed are not lost when editing
images on a computer. When an image is opened by non-compatible
software, the colors look lighter.
AE Metering
Brightness of subject is measured to determine exposure. In this camera,
select from [Multi-segment Metering], [Center-weighted Metering] and[Spot Metering].
AF point
Position in the viewfinder that determines focus. In this camera, selectfrom [Auto], [Select] and [Spot].
Aperture
The aperture increases or reduces the light beam (thickness) passing
through the lens to the CMOS sensor.
Bright Portion
Overexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears white.

CMOS sensor
Photography element which converts light entering through the lens into
electric signals that create an image.

11
Appendix

Camera Shake (Blur)
When the camera moves while the shutter is open, the entire image
appears blurred. This occurs more often when shutter speed is low.
Prevent camera shake by raising the sensitivity, using the flash, andraising the shutter speed. Alternatively, use a tripod to stabilize thecamera. As camera shake is most likely to occur when pressing the shutter
release button, use the Shake Reduction function, Self-timer or Remote
Control shooting to prevent camera movement.

338

Color SpaceA defined range of colors from the spectrum which are used. In digital
cameras, [sRGB] is defined as the standard by Exif. In this camera,[AdobeRGB], which supports a wider color gamut than sRGB, can be also
used.
Color TemperatureThis numerically expresses the color of the light source illuminating the
subject. This is indicated in absolute temperature, using Kelvin (K) units.
The color of light shifts to a bluish color as the color temperature rises, andto a reddish color as the color temperature falls.
Dark Portion
Underexposed area in an image loses contrast and appears black.
DCF (Design rule for Camera File system)
A digital camera file system standard established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Depth of field
Area of focus. This depends on the aperture value, lens focal length, anddistance to the subject. For example, select a smaller aperture value(higher number) to increase the depth of field or use a larger aperture
value (smaller number) to decrease the depth of field.
DNG RAW file
DNG (Digital Negative) is a general-purpose RAW file format designed by
Adobe Systems. When images captured in proprietary RAW formats areconverted to DNG format, support and compatibility for the images
increases significantly.

11
Appendix

DPOF (Digital Print Order Format)
Rules for writing information onto a card with recorded images regarding
the specific images and number of copies to be printed. Prints can easily
be made by taking the images to a DPOF photo printing store.

Dynamic Range (D-Range)
Indicated with a value expressing the light level reproducible in an image.
This is the same as the term “Exposure latitude” used with silver halidefilm.
Generally, when the dynamic range is wide, overexposed and/or
underexposed areas are less likely to occur within the image, and when
the dynamic range is narrow, all image tones can be reproduced sharply
and accurately.

339

EV (Exposure Value)
Exposure value is determined by a combination of the aperture value andthe shutter speed.
EV Compensation
Process of adjusting the image brightness by changing the shutter speed
and/or aperture value.
Exif (Exchangeable image file format for digital still camera)
A standard digital camera file format established by the Japan Electronics
and Information Technology Industries Association (JEITA).
Exposure Bracketing
For automatically changing exposure. When the shutter release button ispressed, three images are captured. The first one has no compensation,
the second is underexposed and the third is over-exposed.
HistogramA graph that shows the darkest and brightest points in an image. The
horizontal axis represents the brightness and the vertical axis represents
the number of pixels. This is useful when you check the exposure level ofan image.
11
Appendix

ISO Sensitivity
The level of sensitivity to light. With a high sensitivity, images can be shotwith a high shutter speed even in dark places, reducing camera shake.
However, images taken with a high sensitivity are more susceptible tonoise.

340

JPEG
An image compression method. In this camera, select from C (Best),
D (Better), or E (Good). Images recorded in JPEG format are suited forviewing on your computer or attaching to e-mail.
ND (Neutral Density) Filter
A filter available in different saturation levels that adjusts the brightness
without affecting the color tone of pictures.
Noise Reduction
Process to reduce noise (image roughness or unevenness) caused byslow shutter speed or high sensitivity shooting.
NTSC/PAL
These are video output formats. NTSC is mainly used in Japan, North
America, and South Korea. PAL is mainly used in Europe and China.
Quality Level
This refers to the image compression ratio. The lower the compression,
the more detailed the image. The image becomes rougher as thecompression rate rises.
RAW data
Unedited image data output from the CMOS sensor. RAW data is data
before being internally processed by the camera. Camera settings at thetime of capture, such as White Balance, Contrast, Saturation, andSharpness can be set for each frame after shooting. In addition, RAW data
is 12 bit data that contain 16 times the information of 8 bit JPEG data. Rich
gradations are possible. Transfer RAW data to your computer and use theprovided software to create image data with different settings, such as
JPEG.

11
Appendix

Recorded Pixels
Indicates the size of the image by the number of pixels. The more pixels
that compose a picture, the larger the image size.
Shutter Speed
The length of time that the shutter is open and light strikes the CMOS
sensor. The amount of light that strikes the CMOS sensor can be changedby altering the shutter speed.

sRGB (standard RGB)
International standard of color space established by the IEC (International
Electrotechnical Commission). This is defined from color space forcomputer monitors and is also used as the standard color space for Exif.

341

Vignetting
The picture edges are blackened when part of the light coming from thesubject is blocked by the hood or filter ring, or when the flash is partially
blocked by the lens.
White Balance
While shooting, color temperature is adjusted to match the light source sothat the subject appears to have the correct color.

11
AppendixIndex342

Symbols

11
Appendix[A Rec. Mode] Menu .... 87, 304[Q Playback] Menu .... 221, 307[R Set-up] Menu ......... 266, 308[A Custom Setting] Menu....................................... 89, 309
Q (Playback) button................................... 21, 23, 82| (Green) button ..... 21, 23, 197
mc (EV Compensation)
button ............................. 21, 117
K/i (Flash pop-up/Delete)button ................... 21, 23, 78, 84
I Auto Picture ........... 69, 92= Portrait ............................... 92s Landscape ........................ 92
q Macro ................................. 92\ Moving Object ................... 92. Night Scene Portrait ......... 92
d Blue Sky .......................... 92
a Flash Off ............................ 92
A Night Scene ...................... 93
Q Surf & Snow ..................... 93
K Food .................................. 93
K Sunset ............................. 93
n Stage Lighting .................. 93
l Night Snap ........................ 93
Z Night Scene HDR ............ 93
R Kids .................................... 93
Y Pet .................................... 93
U Candlelight ........................ 93
E Museum ........................... 93
C Movie .............................. 167

A
AC adapter ............................. 50
Accessories ......................... 320

Action in a Mode .................112
Adding the date ....................286
AdobeRGB ...................205, 337
AE Lock ................112, 120, 133
AE Metering ..................114, 337
AF Fine Adjustment ..............128
AF assist light .................19, 127= (Autofocus) ....................122=/L button ............21, 123
AF coupler ..............................19
AF Mode ...............................125
AF point ........................129, 337
AF160FC ......................180, 321
AF200FG ......................180, 321
AF360FGZ ....................180, 321
AF540FGZ ....................180, 321
Alkaline batteries ....................46
Aperture ..........................96, 337
Aperture Priority Mode c ....108
Aperture ring .................104, 314
Aspect ratio ..........................251
Auto Flash Discharge .............77
Auto Image Rotation .............222
Auto Picture I ............69, 92
Auto Power Off .....................281
F (White Balance) .........200
Autofocus = .......................122c (Aperture Priority) Mode.............................................108
AV cable ...............................242
AV device .............................242

B
Base Parameter Adj (Digital
Filter) ....................................253
Battery ......................43, 46, 282
Battery Type .........................282

Beep .................................... 269
Blue Sky d .......................... 92
Bright areas ........... 31, 207, 337
Bright/Dark Area warning ..... 222
Brightness adjustment ......... 207
Brightness Level .................. 277
Brightness of the monitor ..... 277
Built-in Flash .......................... 75
Bulb shooting ....................... 113

C

343

D
Dark areas ..............31, 208, 338
Date Adjustment .....................64
Date change .........................270
Daylight (White Balance) ......200
Daylight-Sync Shooting ..........80
DCF ......................................338
Default settings .....................304
Delete .............................84, 236
Delete all images ..................239
Delete folder .........................238
Deleting a single image ..........84
Depth of field ..................97, 338
Destination ...........................270
Detailed information display ...28
Developing ...........................259
Digital Filter ..................155, 253
Digital Preview ..............137, 140
Diopter adjustment .................58
Direct keys ................34, 86, 304
Display Color ........................276
Display language ............60, 273
Distortion ..............................211
DNG .............................196, 338
DPOF ...........................285, 338
Drive Mode .............................86
Dueling Images ....................246
Dust Alert ..............................316
Dust Removal .......................315
Dynamic Range ......99, 207, 339

EE-dial ................................21, 23
E-dial in Program ..................105

11
Appendix

Calendar display .................. 226
Camera shake ............. 141, 337
Candlelight U ........................ 93
Capture Mode ........................ 91
Card access lamp .................. 19
Catch-in Focus ..................... 136
Center-weighted .................. 115
Charging ................................ 43
City names ........................... 272
Cloudy (White Balance) ....... 200
CMOS sensor ...................... 337
CMOS sensor cleaning ........ 315
Color (Digital Filter) ...... 156, 254
Color of the monitor ............. 278
Color Space ................. 205, 338
Color Temperature ....... 202, 338
Computer ............................. 291
Continuous Autofocus .......... 133
Continuous mode k ....... 125
Continuous Shooting ........... 149
Contrast (Custom Image) .... 213
Contrast AF .......................... 160
Contrast-Control-Sync mode
(flash) ................................... 189
Control panel ................... 26, 35
Copyright Holder .................. 283
Correct exposure ................... 96
Creating New Folders .......... 279
Cropping .............................. 251
Cross Processing ................. 216

f (White Balance) ...........200
Custom Filter (Digital Filters).....................................156, 254
Custom Image ......................213[A Custom Setting] Menu.......................................89, 309

344

11

Editing movies ..................... 171
Error message ..................... 325
EV ........................................ 339
EV Compensation ........ 117, 339
mc (EV Compensation)
button ............................. 21, 117
EV Steps .............................. 118
Exif ............................... 283, 339
Exposure ................................ 96
Exposure Bracketing .... 118, 339
Exposure mode .................... 103
Exposure warning..................................... 108, 109
External flash ....................... 180
Extract Color (Digital Filter)..................................... 155, 254
Eyecup ................................... 58

Focus point ...................129, 337
Focusing ...............................122
Focusing area .......................129
Folder display .......................225
Folder Name .........................279
Food K ...................................93
Format ..................................268
Four-way controller(2345) .........................21, 23

F

HDR (Digital Filter) ...............254
HDR Capture ........................209
Help ......................................300
High Contrast (Digital Filter).....................................155, 253
High Dynamic Range ...........209
High/Low Key Adjustment(Custom Image) ....................213
High-ISO NR ........................100
Highlight Correction ..............207
High-Speed Flash Sync mode
(flash) ...................................182
Histogram .......................30, 339
Hometown ............................270
Hue (Custom Image) ............213

AppendixFace Detection AF ............... 160
File Format ........... 195, 196, 296
File number .......................... 280
Filter ............................. 155, 253
Filter Effect (Custom Image)............................................. 213
Fish-eye (Digital Filter)..................................... 155, 254
Flash .............................. 75, 173
Flash (White Balance) ......... 200
Flash Exposure Compensation............................................... 81
Flash Off a ............................ 92
K/i (Flash pop-up/Delete)button ................... 21, 23, 78, 84
Fluorescent Light (White
Balance) ............................... 200
Focal length ......................... 143
Focus indicator .............. 70, 134
Focus Lock .......................... 132
Focus Mode ......................... 122
Focus mode lever .......... 21, 122GGame ....................................246
Green button ............21, 23, 197
Grid display ..........................161
Guide Display .................24, 274
Guide indicator .......................32

H

I
Image Comparison ...............228
Image plane indicator .............19
Image storage capacity ..........55
Image Tone ..........................213
Index .....................................229
M button ...............21, 23, 27

Infrared port ........................... 19
Infrared transmission ........... 244
Initial settings ......................... 60
Initializing ............................. 268
Input Focal Length ............... 143
Installing software ................ 296
Instant Review ............... 71, 276
Interval Shooting .................. 151
IrSimple ................................ 244
ISO Sensitivity ............... 98, 339

J
JPEG ........................... 195, 340
JPEG Quality ................. 54, 193
JPEG Recorded Pixels....................................... 54, 192

K
Kelvin ........................... 202, 338
Kids R .................................... 93

La (Manual) Mode .................110
Macintosh .............................292
Macro q .................................92
Main switch .................21, 23, 59
Manual Flash Discharge .........78
Manual focus \ .................134
Manual Mode a ...................110
Manual White Balance .........202
Mass Storage Class .............294
Matte Field ............................135
Memory ................................288
3 button .............21, 23, 37
Menu operation ......................37
Menu page display ...............275
Meter Operating Time ..........116
Metering method ..................114\ (Manual focus) ...............134
Miniature (Digital Filter) ........253
Mirror Lock-up ......................145
Mirror Up ..............................318
Mode dial ..........................21, 91
Monitor ...................................24
Monochrome (Digital Filter).............................................253
Movie ....................................165
Moving Object \ ...................92
MSC .....................................294
Multi-exposure ......................153
Multi-image display ...............224
Multiple flash shooting ..........188
Multi-segment .......................114
Museum E ............................93N
ND (Neutral Density) Filter ...340
Night Scene A .......................93
Night Scene HDRZ ..............93
Night Scene Portrait . ..........92
Night Snap l .........................93345

11
Appendix

Landscape s ........................ 92
Language setting ........... 60, 273
Lateral chromatic aberration............................................. 211
LCD Color Tuning ................ 278
Lens ............................... 56, 312
Lens Correction ................... 211
Lens information contacts ...... 19
Lens mount index .................. 19
Lens unlock button ..... 19, 21, 57
Lens with aperture ring..................................... 104, 314
Lithium batteries .................... 46
Live View ............................. 159
Locking the exposure ... 120, 133
Locking the focus ................. 132
U button ....................... 21, 162

M

346

Ni-MH rechargeable batteries............................................... 46
Noise Reduction .......... 100, 340
NTSC ........................... 243, 340O
4 button ............... 21, 23, 130
One Push File Format .......... 198
Optical Preview ............ 137, 139
Optional accessories ........... 320

P

11
Appendixe (Program) Mode .............. 104
PAL .............................. 243, 340
Pastel (Digital Filter) ............ 253
PC/AV terminal .................... 242
PEF ...................................... 196
PENTAX Digital Camera
Utility 4 ................................. 296
Pet Y .................................... 93
Phase Difference AF ............ 160
Photographer information .... 283
Picture mode .......................... 92
Picture Transfer Protocol ..... 294
Pixel Mapping ...................... 287
Pixels ................................... 192
Playback ................................ 82
Q (Playback) button................................... 21, 23, 82[Q Playback] Menu .... 221, 307
Playback mode palette..................................... 220, 307
Playback time ........................ 49
Playing back images
continuously ......................... 232
Playing back movies ............ 169
Portrait = ............................... 92
Posterization (Digital Filter) .. 253
Power ..................................... 59
Press fully .............................. 72
Press halfway ........................ 72

Preview .................................137
Product registration ..............301
Program Mode e .................104
Protect ..................................240
Provided software .................296
PTP ......................................294
P-TTL (Flash) .......................186
P-TTL Auto (Flash) ...............181

Q
Quality Level.......................54, 165, 193, 340
Quick Zoom ..........................222

R
RAW .............................195, 340
RAW Development ...............259
RAW File Format ..................196[A Rec. Mode] Menu .....87, 304
Recorded Pixels.......................54, 165, 192, 340
Red-eye reduction ..........79, 186
Remaining image storage
capacity ..................................49
Remote Control ....................147
Reset ....................................310
Resize ..................................250
Retro (Digital Filter) ......155, 253
Rotate ...................................235

S
Saturation (Custom Image).............................................213
H (Scene) mode .................93
SD Memory Card ....................52
Select & Delete .....................236
Self-timer ..............................145
Sensitivity ...............................98
Sensitivity Priority Mode K.............................................106
Sensor Cleaning ...................318

T
Taking pictures continuously............................................. 149
Text Size .............................. 274
Toning (Custom Image) ....... 213

Toy Camera (Digital Filter).....................................155, 253
Trailing Curtain Sync ....176, 187
Transmission method ...........245
Tungsten Light (White Balance).............................................200
TV .........................................242b (Shutter Priority) Mode ....107

347

U
USB Connection ...................293
USB Connection mode .........293

V
Video Output Format ............243
Viewfinder .........................32, 58
Vignetting .............................341

W
Water Color (Digital Filter) ....253
White Balance ..............200, 341
Windows ...............................292
Wireless flash control ...........186
Wireless Mode (Flash) .........183
World Time ...........................270
Write-protect ...........................53

Z
Zoom display ........................223
Zoom lens ...............................74

11
Appendix[R Set-up] Menu ......... 266, 308
Shade (White Balance) ........ 200
Shadow Correction .............. 208
Shake Reduction ......... 141, 166
Sharpness (Custom Image)............................................. 213
Shooting Information .............. 25
Show Grid ............................ 161
Shutter Priority Mode b ...... 107
Shutter release button................................... 21, 23, 72
Shutter speed ................ 96, 340
Single mode l ............... 125
Sketch Filter (Digital Filter)............................................. 253
Slideshow ............................ 232
Slim (Digital Filter) ............... 254
Slow Shutter Speed NR ....... 102
Slow-speed Sync ................. 174
Soft (Digital Filter) ........ 155, 254
Sound .................................. 166
Spot Metering ...................... 115
sRGB ........................... 205, 341
Stage Lighting n .................. 93
Starburst (Digital Filter)..................................... 155, 254
Status display ...................... 276
Status screen ......................... 25
Strap ...................................... 42
Sunset K ............................. 93
Superimpose AF Area ......... 129
Surf & Snow Q ..................... 93
K (Sensitivity Priority) Mode............................................. 106

348

WARRANTY POLICYAll PENTAX cameras purchased through authorized bona fide
photographic distribution channels are guaranteed against defects ofmaterial or workmanship for a period of twelve months from date ofpurchase. Service will be rendered, and defective parts will be replaced
without cost to you within that period, provided the equipment does notshow evidence of impact, sand or liquid damage, mishandling, tampering,battery or chemical corrosion, operation contrary to operating instructions,or modification by an unauthorized repair shop. The manufacturer or its
authorized representatives shall not be liable for any repair or alterations
except those made with its written consent and shall not be liable fordamages from delay or loss of use or from other indirect or consequential
damages of any kind, whether caused by defective material orworkmanship or otherwise; and it is expressly agreed that the liability ofthe manufacturer or its representatives under all guarantees or warranties,
whether expressed or implied, is strictly limited to the replacement of parts
as hereinbefore provided. No refunds will be made on repairs by nonauthorized PENTAX service facilities.

11
Appendix

Procedure During 12-month Warranty Period
Any PENTAX which proves defective during the 12-month warranty period
should be returned to the dealer from whom you purchased the equipment
or to the manufacturer. If there are no representatives of the manufacturer
in your country, send the equipment to the manufacturer, with postage
prepaid. In this case, it will take a considerable length of time before theequipment can be returned to you owing to the complicated customs
procedures required. If the equipment is covered by warranty, repairs will
be made and parts replaced free of charge, and the equipment will be
returned to you upon completion of servicing. If the equipment is notcovered by warranty, regular charges of the manufacturer or of its
representatives will apply. Shipping charges are to be borne by the owner.
If your PENTAX was purchased outside of the country where you wish tohave it serviced during the warranty period, regular handling and servicing
fees may be charged by the manufacturer’s representatives in thatcountry. Notwithstanding this, your PENTAX returned to the manufacturer
will be serviced free of charge according to this procedure and warranty
policy. In any case, however, shipping charges and customs clearance
fees to be borne by the sender. To prove the date of your purchase whenrequired, please keep the receipt or bills covering the purchase of yourequipment for at least a year. Before sending your equipment for servicing,please make sure that you are sending it to the manufacturer’s authorized
representatives or their approved repair shops, unless you are sending it
directly to the manufacturer. Always obtain a quotation for the service
charge, and only after you accept the quoted service charge, instruct theservice station to proceed with the servicing.

349• This warranty policy does not affect the customer’s statutory
rights.
• The local warranty policies available from PENTAX distributors insome countries can supersede this warranty policy. Therefore, we
recommend that you review the warranty card supplied with yourproduct at the time of purchase, or contact the PENTAX distributor
in your country for more information and to receive a copy of thewarranty policy.

11
Appendix

The CE Mark is a Directive conformity mark of the European
Union.

350

For customers in USA
STATEMENT OF FCC COMPLIANCE
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject
to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation.
Changes or modifications not approved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for aClass B digital device, pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.
These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against
harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment
generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not
installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmfulinterference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee thatinterference will not occur in a particular installation.
If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television
reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on,
the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of
the following measures:• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.
• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.
• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that towhich the receiver is connected.
* Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.
For customers in CanadaThis Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
Pour les utilisateurs au Canada
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003
du Canada.

11
Appendix

FOR CALIFORNIA, U.S.A. ONLY
Perchlorate Material-special handling may apply.
The lithium battery used in this camera contains perchlorate material,
which may require special handling.
See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorateDeclaration of Conformity
According to 47CFR, Parts 2 and 15 forClass B Personal Computers and Peripherals
We:

PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.

Located at:

600 12 th Street, Suite 300
Golden, Colorado 80401 U.S.A.
Phone: 303-799-8000 FAX: 303-790-1131

Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified hereincomplies with 47CFR Parts 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital
device. Each product marketed is identical to the representative unit tested
and found to be compliant with the standards. Records maintained
continue to reflect the equipment being produced can be expected to bewithin the variation accepted, due to quantity production and testing on thestatistical basis as required by 47CFR §2.909. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmfulinterference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired operation. The above
named party is responsible for ensuring that the equipment complies withthe standards of 47CFR §15.101 to §15.109.

Product Name:PENTAX Digital Still Camera

Model Number: W
Contact person: Customer Service Manager
Date and Place: October, 2010, Colorado

Information for Users on Collection and Disposal of Old
Equipment and Used Batteries
1. In the European Union
These symbols on the products, packaging and/or
accompanying documents mean that used electrical andelectronic equipments and batteries should not be mixed withgeneral household waste.
Used electrical/electronic equipments and batteries must betreated separately and in accordance with legislation that
requires proper treatment, recovery and recycling of theseproducts.
Following the implementation by member states, privatehouseholds within the EU states may return their usedelectrical/electronic equipments and batteries to designatedcollection facilities free of charge*.
In some countries your local retailer may also take back yourold product free of charge if you purchase a similar new one.
*Please contact your local authority for further details.
By disposing of this product correctly you will help ensure thatthe waste undergoes the necessary treatment, recovery andrecycling and thus prevent potential negative effects on theenvironment and human health which could otherwise arise
due to inappropriate waste handling.
2. In other countries outside the EU
These symbols are only valid in the European Union. If you
wish to discard these items, please contact your local
authorities or dealer and ask for the correct method of disposal.
For Switzerland: Used electrical/electronic equipment can be
returned free of charge to the dealer, even when you don’tpurchase a new product. Further collection facilities are listedon the home page of www.swico.ch or www.sens.ch.
Note for the battery symbol (bottom two symbol examples):This symbol might be used in combination with a designation
for the chemical element or compound in use. In this case you
have to comply with the requirement set by the Directive for thechemicals involved.

HOYA CORPORATIONPENTAX Imaging Systems Division
2-35-7, Maeno-cho, Itabashi-ku, Tokyo 174-8639, JAPAN(http://www.pentax.jp)
PENTAX Europe Imaging 112 Quai de Bezons, B.P. 204, 95106 Argenteuil Cedex,
Systems S.A.S.
FRANCE(European Headquarters) (HQ - http://www.pentaxeurope.com)(France - http://www.pentax.fr)

SLR Digital Camera

PENTAX Imaging Systems Julius-Vosseler-Strasse 104, 22527 Hamburg,GmbH
GERMANY(http://www.pentax.de)
PENTAX Imaging Systems PENTAX House, Heron Drive, Langley, Slough, Berks
LimitedSL3 8PN, U.K.
(http://www.pentax.co.uk)

Operating Manual

PENTAX Imaging Company
A Division of PENTAX of America, Inc.
(Headquarters)
600 12th Street, Suite 300 Golden, Colorado 80401,
U.S.A.
(PENTAX Service Department)
250 North 54th Street Chandler, Arizona 85226, U.S.A.
(http://www.pentaximaging.com)
1770 Argentia Road Mississauga, Ontario L5N 3S7,
CANADA(http://www.pentax.ca)

PENTAX Trading(SHANGHAI) Limited

23D, Jun Yao International Plaza, 789 Zhaojiabang Road,Xu Hui District, Shanghai, 200032 CHINA(http://www.pentax.com.cn)

http://www.pentax.jp/english

Operating Manual

PENTAX Canada Inc.

• Specifications and external dimensions are subject to change without notice.
58187

Copyright © HOYA CORPORATION 2010
H01-201008 Printed in Philippines

For optimum camera performance, please read the Operating
Manual before using the camera.